BMW X1 Owner's Manual

Contents
Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
THE BMW X1.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
X1
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
deutsch II/15, 03 15 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Addendum
ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL
We wanted to provide you with some updates
and clarifications with respect to the printed
BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and
clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.
1. Where the terms “service center,” “the service center,” “your service center,” “service
specialist,” or “service” are used in the
Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that
the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service
center or another service center or repair
shop that employs trained personnel that
can perform maintenance and repair work
on your vehicle in accordance with BMW
specifications.
2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a
“service center” or “your service center,”
we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the
situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW
dealer's service center or another service
center or repair shop that employs trained
personnel that can perform maintenance
and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.
While BMW of North America LLC, at no
cost to you, will pay for repairs required by
the limited warranties provided with respect
to your vehicle and for maintenance under
the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage
periods, you are free to elect, both during
those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other
service centers or repair shops.
3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been
approved by BMW, those references are
intended to reflect that those parts and
accessories are recommended by BMW of
North America LLC. You may elect to use
other parts and accessories, but, if you do,
we recommend that you make sure that any
such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.
4. At page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states
that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there,” the text should read
that you “may not be able to lodge warranty
claims for your vehicle there.”
5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accessories” section, the sentence beginning “For
your own safety … ,” should be disregarded
and the following the text should be read in
lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your
vehicle recommends using genuine BMW
parts and accessories.” In the fifth sentence, the word “cannot” should read “does
not.”
6. At page 49, in the “Checking and replacing
safety belts” section, the text beginning,
“Have the work performed only by your service center …” should be disregarded and
the following text should be read in lieu
thereof: “BMW recommends having this
work performed by a service center as it is
important that this safety feature functions
properly.”
7. At page 134 under the heading: “Objects in
the area around the pedals” and at page
266 under the heading: “Carpets and floor
mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use
floor mats …” should be disregarded and
the following language should be read in
lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your
vehicle recommends that you use floor
mats that have been identified by it as
appropriate for use in your vehicle and that
can be properly fixed in place.”
8. At page 140, under the heading: “Have
maintenance carried out,” the sentence
beginning, “Have the maintenance carried
out …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Addendum
“BMW recommends that you have the
maintenance carried out by your service
center.”
9. At page 225, under the heading “Apps” and
subheading “Requirements,” the section
that begins, “Use only … ,” should be disregarded and the following text should be
read in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends the use of BMW
recommended software; otherwise there
may be malfunctions in system operations.”
10. At page 232, under the heading “Pressure
specifications,” the sentence beginning,
“The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved … .” should be disregarded.
11. At page 240, under the heading: “Approved
wheels and tires,” the term “Approved”
should be disregarded and in lieu thereof,
the term “Recommended” should be read
in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly
suggests that you use wheels and tires that
have been recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same
official size ratings, variations can lead to
body contact and with it, the risk of severe
accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate non-recommended wheels and
tires to determine if they are suitable for use
on your vehicle.
12. At page 243, under the heading “Hood,” the
sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”
should be disregarded.
13. At page 248, under the heading: “Service
and Warranty Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models,” the second
paragraph should be disregarded and the
following text read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and
repair performed by your BMW dealer's service center or another service center or
repair shop that employs trained personnel
that can perform maintenance and repair
work on your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications. The manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you maintain
records of all maintenance and repair work
performed on your vehicle.
14. At page 250 and page 252, where it reads:
“Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps,” that text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following
text should be read: “Xenon headlamp work
or replacement can cause serious and fatal
injuries.” In the text that follows, where it
reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon lighting system … ,” the following words should
be read as preceding that passage: “It is
strongly suggested that you … .”
15. At page 255, under the “Battery replacement” section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text
should be read:
Use of recommended vehicle batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it
has tested and recommends for use in your
vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions may not
be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you
have the battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that
any “check control” messages of these
comfort functions are no longer displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 280.
Entertainment
6
Communication
Notes
At a glance
14
20
27
Cockpit
iDrive
Voice activation system
198
209
218
221
Telephone
Office
Contacts
ConnectedDrive
Mobility
Controls
32
46
54
59
73
85
90
99
103
110
115
125
166 Tone
168 Radio
176 CD/multimedia
Opening and closing
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lamps
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driving comfort
Climate
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Driving tips
228
230
232
242
247
249
257
263
Refueling
Fuel
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Maintenance
Replacing components
Breakdown assistance
Care
Reference
270 Technical data
272 Short commands for voice activation
system
280 Everything from A to Z
132 Things to remember when driving
136 Loading
139 Saving fuel
Navigation
144
146
155
163
Navigation system
Destination entry
Destination guidance
What to do if...
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
Vehicle equipment
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all
series equipment, as well as country-specific
and special equipment offered in the model
series.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐
scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
contained in your vehicle because of the se‐
lected special equipment or country version,
for example.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver's Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
For options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
plementary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Status of this Owner's
Manual at time of printing
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Notes
For your own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
— homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper‐
ated in a different country it might be neces‐
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ‐
ing operating conditions and permit
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims
for your vehicle there. Further information can
be obtained from your Service Center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair
methods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, it is recommended that
you use genuine parts and accessories ap‐
proved by BMW. When you purchase accesso‐
ries tested and approved by BMW and Genu‐
ine BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire
the assurance that they have been thoroughly
tested by BMW to ensure optimum perform‐
ance when installed on your vehicle. BMW
warrants these parts to be free from defects in
material and workmanship. BMW will not ac‐
cept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not ap‐
proved by BMW. BMW cannot test every
product made by other manufacturers to verify
if it can be used on a BMW safely and without
risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its
occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Acces‐
sories and other products approved by BMW,
together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all BMW cen‐
ters. Installation and operation of non BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment,
for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive dam‐
age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, in‐
terfere with the vehicle's electrical system or
affect the validity of the BMW Limited War‐
ranty. See your BMW center for additional in‐
formation. Maintenance, replacement, or repair
of the emission control devices and systems
may be performed by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using any certified
automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
7
Notes
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐
cle contain data memories that store technical
information on the vehicle condition, events
and faults, either temporarily or permanently.
This technical information generally docu‐
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment.
▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐
nents, such as filling levels.
▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its
individual components, such as wheel rpm/
speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐
tion.
▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐
tem components, such as lights and
brakes.
▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐
tions, such as airbag deployment, use of
the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐
ture.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
These data are of a technical nature only and
are used to detect and eliminate faults and to
optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of
routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre‐
ated from these data. If services are used, for
instance in the event of repairs, service proc‐
esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc.,
this technical information can be read out from
the event and fault data memories by service
personnel, including the manufacturer, using
special diagnosis tools. This service personnel
can provide you with more information if
needed. After troubleshooting, the information
in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten
continuously.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
Situations are conceivable during the use of
the vehicle in which these technical data could
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Notes
become associated with a specific person in
combination with other information, such as an
accident report, damage to the vehicle, wit‐
ness accounts, etc., possibly with the involve‐
ment of an authorized expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
calization in the event of an emergency, permit
the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the
vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety- related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
9
Notes
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Notes
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
All around the steering wheel
1
Safety switch for rear power win‐
dows 43
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 86
2
Power windows 42
Adaptive Light Control 86
3
Exterior mirror operation 51
High-beam Assistant 87
4
Lamps
Front fog lamps 88
Parking lights 85
5
Steering column stalk, left
Low beams 85
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Cockpit
Turn signal 64
At a glance
Change the radio station
Select a music track
High-beams, head‐
light flasher 87
Scroll through the redial list
High-beam Assistant 87
Next entertainment source
Roadside parking lights 87
Recirculated air mode 112
Computer 75
Settings and information about
the vehicle 76
10
11 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 64
Instrument lighting 89
6
Rain sensor 65
Steering wheel buttons, left
Telephone 198
Volume
Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 59
Rear window wiper 66
12 Ignition lock 59
Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐
vation system 27
13
Steering wheel heating 53
14 Horn, the entire surface
7
Shift paddles 69
8
Instrument cluster 16
9
Steering wheel buttons, right
15 Adjust the steering wheel 53
16
Cruise control 103
17 Opening tailgate 38
18 Releasing the hood 243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
15
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
1
Speedometer
▷ Hill Descent Control 101
2
Indicator/warning lamps 17
▷ Computer 75
3
Tachometer 74
4
Current fuel consumption 74
▷ Date of next scheduled service, and re‐
maining distance to be driven 80
Engine oil temperature 74
▷ Odometer and trip odometer 73
Display for
▷ Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor 96
▷ Clock 73
▷ Checking engine oil level 243
▷ External temperature 73
▷ Settings and information 76
▷ Indicator/warning lamps 17
▷
5
▷ Cruise control 103
6
Display for
▷ Automatic transmission position 68
16
Check Control message
present 82
7
Fuel gauge 74
8
Resetting the trip odometer 73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Cockpit
Indicator/warning lights
At a glance
Symbol Function or system
Front fog lamps, refer to page 88
The concept
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the pro‐
pulsive forces in order to maintain
driving stability, refer to page 99
The parking brake is set, refer to
page 63
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning when the engine is started or the
ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Con‐
trol Display explain the meaning of the dis‐
played indicator and warning lights.
Canada: the parking brake is set, re‐
fer to page 63
Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
fect on emissions, refer to
page 248
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on exhaust emis‐
sions, refer to page 248
Supplementary text messages
You can call up additional information, e.g., on
the cause of a malfunction and on how to re‐
spond, via Check Control, refer to page 82.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
Indicator lights without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system
Turn signals, refer to page 64
High-beams/headlamp flasher, refer
to page 87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
17
At a glance
Cockpit
All around the center console
1
Headliner 19
2
Control Display 20
3
Air vent 113
4
Deactivate the Automatic Engine
Start/Stop Function 61
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 99
Hazard warning system 257
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 100
Central locking system 37
5
Automatic climate control 110
6
Glove compartment 125
7
Radio and CD/DVD drive 168
Programmable memory buttons 24
8
ECO PRO 140
9
Selector lever with automatic transmis‐
sion 67
10 Controller with buttons 20
PDC Park Distance Control 105
rearview camera 107
HDC Hill Descent Control 101
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Cockpit
At a glance
All around the headliner
1
Emergency Request 257
4
Reading lamps 89
2
Panoramic glass sunroof 44
5
Interior lamps 89
3
Indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags 92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
19
At a glance
iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The controller can be used to
select menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions, refer to page 266.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
The concept
Switching off
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Switching on
Controls
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
1
Control Display
2
Controller with buttons
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
iDrive
Controller
At a glance
Press the but‐
ton
Function
Select menu items and create settings.
1. Turn.
NAV
Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL
Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK
Displays the previous panel.
OPTION
Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
2. Press.
Press the button.
3. Move in four directions.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐
ton
Function
MENU
Opens the main menu.
RADIO
Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA
Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
2. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
21
At a glance
iDrive
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
Options menu
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
ous display.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
display".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
22
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
iDrive
Function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
At a glance
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries.
Radio symbols
Symbol
Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
23
At a glance
iDrive
Split screen
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
General information
Missed call.
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
Wireless network reception
strength Symbol flashes: searching
for network.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Wireless network is not available.
Switching the split screen on and off
Incoming or outgoing call.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Text message, e-mail was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Music interface for smartphones.
Programmable memory
buttons
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched
off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
24
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
iDrive
At a glance
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Saving a function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Press the desired button for more
than two seconds.
Enter a blank space.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol
Enter the letters.
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Function
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
ters.
Symbol
▷ To display short information: touch the
button.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
Function
Move the controller forward:
switch from upper to lower case
letters.
Move the controller forward:
switch from lower to upper case
letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
25
At a glance
iDrive
▷ Only those letters are offered during the
entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Voice activation system
At a glance
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via iDrive in this case.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated with the
voice activation system using spoken com‐
mands. The system prompts you to make
your entries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated
using the voice activation system.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
▷ The system uses a special microphone lo‐
cated in the area of the interior rearview
mirror.
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 79.
The functions of the main menu have short
commands.
Some list items, such as the phone book en‐
tries, can also be selected via the voice activa‐
tion system. Say the list items exactly as they
are displayed on the list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read possible com‐
mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
27
At a glance
Voice activation system
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, usually
irrespective of which menu item is currently
selected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 272.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
6.
Press the button on the steering
wheel again to select a specific track.
7. ›Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Via short commands
Playback of the CD can also be started using a
short command.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D drive Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are an‐
nounced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
announcements from the system are issued in
an abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Example: playing back a CD
2. "Language/Units"
Via the main menu
4. Select the setting.
3. "Speech mode:"
The commands of the menu items are spoken
out loud, in the same way as they are selected
via the controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹
Adjusting the volume
5. ›C D drive‹
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
The CD is played back.
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Voice activation system
At a glance
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 257, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 41.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐
mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, re‐
fer to Personal Profile.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 247.
Integrated key
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
Press button 1 and pull out the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door, refer to page 36.
1
Unlocking
2
Locking
3
Opening tailgate
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with keys.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice
a year for longer road trips in order to maintain
the batteries' charge status.
32
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Opening and closing
Controls
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated in the remote
control.
▷ Show visual warning for the Park Distance
Control PDC, refer to page 106.
▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
file is called up.
▷ Function selection, refer to page 107.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
▷ rearview camera:
▷ Type of display, refer to page 109.
▷ Light settings:
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 64.
▷ Welcome lights, refer to page 85.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi‐
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in
use.
▷ Headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 86.
Personal Profile settings
▷ High-beam Assistant, refer to
page 87.
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Assigning the programmable memory but‐
tons, refer to page 24.
▷ Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked, refer to
page 34.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 37.
▷ Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi‐
tion after unlocking, refer to page 35.
▷ Settings for the display on the Control Dis‐
play and in the instrument cluster:
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to
page 78.
▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
page 86.
▷ Automatic climate control: AUTO program,
cooling function and automatic recircu‐
lated air control activated/deactivated,
temperature, air flow rate and distribution,
refer to page 110.
▷ Navigation:
▷ Voice activation, refer to page 157.
▷ Route criteria, refer to page 155.
▷ Map view settings, refer to page 159.
▷ Entertainment:
▷ Tone control, refer to page 166.
▷ Radio, stored stations, refer to
page 174.
▷ CD/multimedia, audio source listened
to last, refer to page 176.
▷ Telephone: volume, refer to page 202.
▷ Date format, refer to page 79.
▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 80.
Central locking system
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 79.
The concept
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 77.
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
33
Controls
Opening and closing
Unlocking
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
handles on the driver's and front passen‐
ger sides.
The following takes place simultaneously
when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
mote control:
The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed,
refer to page 41.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system,
refer to page 37.
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel
filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
▷ "Driver's door only"
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing: from
the outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
34
Only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
unlocks the entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
The windows and the panoramic glass sunroof
open.
Locking
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Opening and closing
Locking from the outside
Controls
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Press the button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po‐
sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
is activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
Unlocking tailgate
Press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second and release.
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo
area. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it
is pushed closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tail‐
gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Failure to do so could cause injury to
persons or damage to objects behind the seat
as a result of a rearward movement of the
seat.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Selecting automatic activation
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
35
Controls
Opening and closing
3. "Last seat position auto."
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Malfunctions
Local radio waves may interfere with the re‐
mote control.
In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door
lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a re‐
mote control, the battery in the remote control
is discharged. Use the remote control during
an extended drive in order to recharge the bat‐
tery, refer to page 32.
The remote control for Comfort Access con‐
tains a battery that may need to be replaced,
refer to page 41.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
The alarm system, refer to page 41, is not
deployed when the vehicle is locked with the
integrated key. The alarm system is triggered
when the door is opened if the vehicle was un‐
locked via the door lock.
To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or insert the remote control into
the ignition lock all the way.
Only the driver's door can be locked via the
door lock.
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
36
Locking from the outside
Locking the doors, the fuel filler flap,
and the tailgate all at once
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐
gate at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
ing the button for the central locking sys‐
tem in the interior, refer to page 37.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Opening and closing
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door, refer to page 37.
Controls
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
3. Lock the vehicle as follows:
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or
lock the driver's door using the integrated key
in the door lock. The other doors must be un‐
locked or locked from the inside.
Opening and closing: from
the inside
Unlocking and opening
▷
Press the button. The doors are
unlocked. To open, pull the door
handle above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door handle above the armrest
twice: the door is unlocked the first time
and opened the second time.
Locking
▷
Locking and unlocking
Press the button in the vehicle.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un‐
locked when the front doors are closed, but
they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Press the button. The doors are
locked.
▷ Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
you from being locked out, the opened
driver's door cannot be locked using the
lock button.
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
37
Controls
Opening and closing
Tailgate
▷
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
The tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung
upward.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening manually
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Opening from the inside
Press the remote control button for ap‐
prox. 1 second and then release.
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, enlarge
the cargo area, refer to page 121.
2. From the cargo area, press out the handle
in the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out as far
as possible. The tailgate is unlocked.
3. Open the tailgate from the outside and
press in the handle.
Press the button.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is
stationary, provided that the tailgate has not
been locked.
In some market-specific versions, this button
does not exist.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Closing
Opening from the outside
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail‐
gate can be used to conveniently pull down the
tailgate.
▷ Press the button next to the tailgate.
38
Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the
cargo area floor panel is not raised, refer to
page 123.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Opening and closing
Keep the closing area clear
Controls
Unlocking
Make sure that the closing area of the
tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage
may result.◀
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas‐
senger door completely, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Locking
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
▷ Convenient closing.
Functional requirement
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons or via Comfort Access.
Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
but‐
This corresponds to pressing the
ton.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
If a remote control is detected within the vehi‐
cle, the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked
again.
Convenient closing
Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
hold.
In addition, the windows and the panoramic
glass sunroof close.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
39
Controls
Opening and closing
Monitor the closing process
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
from the door handle immediately stops the
closing process.◀
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail‐
gate opens again.
Ignition on
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
ignition on.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
pedal, otherwise the engine will start.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can
be switched on when a remote control is inside
the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a re‐
mote control into the ignition lock, refer to
page 59.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off with
transmission position P engaged, refer to
page 61.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using
the buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
Mechanical activation using the integrated key
only locks/unlocks the driver's door.
To start the engine afterward, insert the re‐
mote control into the ignition switch.
Warning lights
The warning light in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started.
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has
a malfunction. Take the remote control with
you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If
necessary, insert another remote control into
the ignition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no lon‐
ger inside the vehicle.
After switching off the engine, the engine can
only be started again within approx. 10 sec‐
onds if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message ap‐
pears on the Control Display: replace
the remote control battery.
To switch the engine off with transmission po‐
sition N engaged, insert the remote control in
the ignition lock.
Malfunction
The Comfort Access functions can be distur‐
bed by local radio waves, such as by a mobile
phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote
control or when a mobile phone is being
charged in the vehicle.
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Opening and closing
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access con‐
tains a battery that will need to be replaced
from time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 32.
2. Remove the cover.
Controls
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via Comfort Access,
the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the
same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened if the vehicle was unlocked via the
door lock.
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or insert the remote control into
the ignition lock all the way and switch on the
ignition.
3. Insert a new battery of the same type with
the positive side facing upwards.
4. Press on the cover to close it.
Return used battery to a recycling center
or to your service center.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz‐
ard warning system flashes once.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 42.
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 34.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into
the ignition lock.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
41
Controls
Opening and closing
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
Interior motion sensor
For the sensor to function properly, the win‐
dows and panoramic glass sunroof must be
closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
The indicator lamp flashes continuously af‐
ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
sensor is not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then flashes continuously.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor remain switched off until the vehicle is
locked again.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Panic mode
In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys‐
tem:
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
jure themselves.◀
Press the button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Opening and closing
Controls
Opening
Pinch protection system
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The window opens while the switch is held.
The window reopens slightly.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Closing
Danger of pinching
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Do not use window accessories
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not install any accessories in the
range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
▷
Closing without the pinch protection
system
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation via the remote control,
refer to page 34.
Convenient operation via the door lock is not
supported.
Convenient closing, refer to page 39, with
Comfort Access.
After the ignition is switched off
When the remote control is removed or the ig‐
nition is switched off, the windows can con‐
tinue to be operated for approx. 1 minute as
long as no door is opened.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force ex‐
ceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, the rear windows are
prevented from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, such as
by children.
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
43
Controls
Opening and closing
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transport‐
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐
vision.◀
Panoramic glass sunroof
Pressing the switch again
closes the sliding visor al‐
most completely.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐
erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀
Opening/closing the sliding visor
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
switch.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
selves.◀
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves
while the switch is being
held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐
tion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri‐
bed under Sliding visor.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Press the switch twice in the de‐
sired direction past the resist‐
ance point.
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press the switch briefly.
▷ The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷ The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The
sliding visor stays com‐
pletely open.
44
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the
remote control or the door lock.
Convenient closing, refer to page 39, with
Comfort Access.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Opening and closing
Controls
Comfort position
Initialization after a power failure
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully
open. This reduces wind noise in the passen‐
ger compartment.
After a power failure, it may only possible to tilt
the roof.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or
closed all the way, it stops in the comfort posi‐
tion. If desired, continue the motion following
this with the switch.
Have the system initialized by your service
center.
After the ignition is switched off
The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,
the closing action may not be interrupted in
certain extreme situations, such as when thin
objects are present.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
45
Controls
Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
nate the protection normally provided by the
belt.◀
Adjusting manually
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 48.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 49.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 90.
Seats
Forward/backward
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly to make sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Note before adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving. The seat could respond with un‐
expected movement and the ensuing loss of
vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front pas‐
senger side too far to the rear during driving.
Otherwise, there is the danger of sliding under
the safety belt in an accident. This would elimi‐
46
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back‐
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Adjusting
Controls
Seat tilt
4
Backrest
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
The head restraint can be adjusted manually,
refer Head restraints below.
Thigh support
Lumbar support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for‐
ward or back.
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐
gion.
Adjusting electrically
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
▷ Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear section of switch.
▷ Shift curvature up or down:
Press upper or lower section of switch.
1
Forward/backward
2
Height
3
Seat tilt
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
47
Controls
Adjusting
Backrest width
The LEDs go out.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down
to no heat in order to reduce the load on the
battery. The LEDs remain lit.
Safety belts
General information
The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to
your own needs.
Press front or rear section of switch.
The backrest width decreases or increases.
Adjusting the rear seat backrests
Adjusting the backrest tilt, refer to page 121.
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Seats with safety belt
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
into the rear seat are for passengers sitting
on the left and right.
Seat heating
▷ The belt buckle embossed with the word
CENTER is intended exclusively for use by
passengers riding in the center position.
▷ If the middle safety belt is used in the rear,
the left backrest must be locked, refer to
page 121; otherwise, the safety belt will
not have a restraining effect.
Notes
Switching on
One person per safety belt
Press the button once for each tem‐
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature set last.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
48
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
impact and injure the abdomen.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Adjusting
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or
breakable objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Controls
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Buckling the belt
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for the driver's
and front passenger seat
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approx. at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
The indicator lamp lights up and a
signal sounds. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
Check whether the safety belt has
been fastened correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
49
Controls
Adjusting
Front
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Height adjustment
Seat and mirror memory
General information
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions can be stored and retrieved.
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
The adjustment of the backrest width and the
lumbar support is not stored in the memory.
Storing
Rear
Height adjustment
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion, refer to page 59.
▷ To raise: pull.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
3.
The height of the middle head restraint cannot
be adjusted.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The LED goes out.
Removing at the front and rear
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again. The LED goes
out.
1. Pull upward as far as possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and completely
pull out the head restraint with the rear
seat backrest folded forward slightly.
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Adjusting
Calling up settings
Controls
At a glance
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while driv‐
ing, as an unexpected seat movement could
result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on the radio ready state, refer to
page 59.
2. Briefly press the desired memory but‐
ton 1 or 2.
The seat is automatically moved to the stored
position.
1
Adjusting
2
Fold in and out
3
Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
Selecting a mirror
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Safety mode
Adjusting electrically
To change over to the other mirror:
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni‐
tion on or off, refer to page 59.
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com‐
pleted.
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 50.
Adjusting manually
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
General information
Automatic Curb Monitor
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's mirror.
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀
Activating
1.
Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
51
Controls
Adjusting
2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission
position R.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press button 2.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
Two photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass, see arrow.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Adjusting
Controls
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
aged.◀
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
53
Controls
Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear only, using child restraint fixing sys‐
tems suitable for the age, weight, and height of
the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk
of injury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to
their age, weight and size.◀
54
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint
fixing system on the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front and side airbags on
the front passenger side are deactivated. Auto‐
matic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 91.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint
fixing systems
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint fixing system
on the front passenger seat, ensure that the
front and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Transporting children safely
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
position to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐
ter this.
Controls
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width, refer to page 48, completely. Do not
change the backrest width after this.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐
rest width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise,
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐
tension in order to permit attachment of child
restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀
1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
with the belt.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
55
Controls
Transporting children safely
LATCH mounting points
Only use the mounting points for the up‐
per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re‐
straint systems; otherwise, the mounting
points could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located behind the indicated cover caps.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child
restraint fixing system.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the
strap will not properly secure the child restraint
fixing system in the event of an accident.◀
Outer rear seats
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐
tem.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
There are three mounting points, see arrows,
for the upper retaining strap of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems.
56
1
Direction of travel
2
Head restraint
3
Cargo area floor
4
Hook for upper retaining strap
5
Mounting point/eye
6
Backrest
7
Upper retaining strap
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper
retaining strap between the rear seat backrest
and the cargo cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Transporting children safely
Controls
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
On outer rear seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
4. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Center rear seat
On center rear seat:
1. Route the upper retaining strap over the
middle of the head restraint.
2. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com‐
presses the cushion of the head restraint,
thus preventing the strap from sliding off.
1
Direction of travel
2
Head restraint
3
Cargo area floor
4
Hook for upper retaining strap
5
Mounting point/eye
6
Backrest
7
Upper retaining strap
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper
retaining strap between the rear seat backrest
and the cargo cover.
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
57
Controls
Transporting children safely
This locks the rear window switches so that
the windows cannot be operated from the rear:
safety switch, refer to page 43.
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving
Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control
out of the ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of
the ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
▷ The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You can only take out the remote control if
transmission position P is engaged: interlock.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Start/Stop button
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
ignition on or off and starts the engine.
▷ Radio ready state is switched on. Individual
electrical consumers can operate.
The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed
when you press the Start/Stop button.
Comfort Access
Radio ready state
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access,
only insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, refer to page 39, under special circum‐
stances.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the external temperature are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
59
Controls
Driving
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, refer to
page 39, by touching the surface above the
door lock.
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The od‐
ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Radio ready state and ignition off
Frequent starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
the danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Starting the engine
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Automatic transmission, 8-gear
In certain situations, transmission position P is
engaged automatically. To make it possible for
the vehicle to roll, such as in an automatic car
wash, follow the instructions in Car washes, re‐
fer to page 263.
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine
General information
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 39.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless but highly toxic
gas.◀
2. Engage transmission position P if neces‐
sary.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐
tion P and set the parking brake firmly; other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving
Engine stop
Controls
engine starts automatically when you wish to
drive away.
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the windows and injure
themselves.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb.◀
Before driving into a car wash
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an
automatic car wash, follow the information on
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to
page 263.
Switching off the engine
Automatic transmission
Automatic operation
The automatic engine Start/Stop function is
operational after each engine start. It is acti‐
vated whenever you drive forward faster than
3 mph/5 km/h.
Automatic engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill.
▷ The driver's safety belt is fastened or the
driver's door is closed.
When the engine is switched off, the air vol‐
ume of the automatic climate control is re‐
duced.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
The indicator lamp lights up when the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
1. Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The indicator lamp lights up if the re‐
quirements for an automatic engine
stop are not fulfilled.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐
tion lock, refer to page 59.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
▷ High external temperature and operation of
the automatic climate control.
▷ The interior is not yet heated or cooled as
much as desired.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
61
Controls
Driving
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ Sharp steering angle or the steering wheel
is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
Safety mode
The engine does not start by itself after it is
switched off automatically if any of the follow‐
ing conditions are fulfilled:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unfastened or
the driver's door is open.
▷ Hood was unlocked.
▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low.
The indicator lamp lights up. A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
▷ Hood is unlocked.
The engine can only be started via
the Start/Stop button.
▷ HDC is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ The selector lever is in position N or M/S.
The indicator lamp is lit.
Parking the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
The vehicle can be parked safely during an au‐
tomatic engine stop, such as when you wish to
leave the vehicle.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Automatic transmission: transmission po‐
sition P is engaged automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Start the engine as usual using the Start/Stop
button.
Note
Even if you do not wish to drive away, the stop‐
ped engine still starts automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ The interior has heated up strongly with
the cooling function switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ The vehicle begins to roll.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from D to N, R or M/S.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R or
M/S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low.
Automatic engine start
▷ The interior has cooled down strongly with
the heating switched on.
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions to enable the driver to drive
away:
▷ Low braking pressure, such as from de‐
pressing the brake pedal a number of times
consecutively.
▷ Automatic transmission:
The brake pedal is released.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Preventing automatic engine stop
with an automatic transmission
The concept
To permit the driver to drive away especially
quickly, such as at intersections, the automatic
engine stop can be actively prevented.
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving
Preventing the engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
▷ Depress the brake pedal briefly and force‐
fully immediately after the vehicle comes to
a standstill.
▷ Then continue depressing the brake pedal
with normal braking force.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Controls
matically.A message appears on the Control
Display. It is possible to continue driving. Have
the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up and an
acoustic signal sounds when driving
away. The parking brake is still set.
Setting
The lever engages automatically.
Releasing
Press the button.
▷ LED lights up: the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: the Auto Start/Stop function
is activated.
Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the
lever.
Automatic deactivation
Notes
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically in the interest
of safety, for example if the driver's absence is
detected.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp lights up. The au‐
tomatic engine start/stop function no
longer switches of the engine auto‐
Using the parking brake while driving
If it should become necessary to use the
parking brake while driving, do not pull the
parking brake too forcefully. Keep the button
on the parking brake lever pressed at all times.
Excessive application of the parking brake can
block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of
the vehicle.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
63
Controls
Driving
To prevent corrosion and uneven brake action,
lightly apply the parking brake from time to
time when coasting, traffic conditions permit‐
ting.
The brake lights do not light up when the park‐
ing brake is pulled.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
3. "Triple turn signal"
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
While driving and when using the turn
signal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional
turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not
be in the appropriate position and will be diffi‐
cult to detect.◀
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
High-beams, headlamp flasher
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
When towing a trailer, the indicator lamp may
also signal the failure of a turn signal bulb on
the trailer.
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
64
1
High-beams
2
Headlamp flasher
Washer/wiper system
Notes
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving
Do not use the wipers on a dry wind‐
shield
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield; oth‐
erwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap‐
idly or become damaged.◀
Controls
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
At a glance
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the
time between wipes is controlled automatically
and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
1
Switching on wipers
2
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3
Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
the rain sensor
4
Cleaning the windshield and headlights
5
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen‐
sitivity of the rain sensor
Activating intermittent wipe or the
rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press up once.
The system switches to operation in the inter‐
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press up twice or press once beyond the re‐
sistance point.
The system switches to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
Press the button, arrow 3.
The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up
and a wiping cycle is started.
Setting intermittent wipe or the
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or the
rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
65
Controls
Driving
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Cleaning the windshield and
headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlights are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
washer/wiper system, refer to page 64, must
be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are switched on.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are
ready for operation.
Rear window wiper
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
1
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐
tomatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
Intermittent wipe
When reverse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
2
Cleaning the rear window
The rear window wiper does not move if the
lever is in position 1 before the ignition is
switched on.
To switch on the rear window wiper:
1. Switch off the ignition.
1. Move the lever to its basic position.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Select the required position again.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
Do not use washing mechanisms when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you
will damage the washer pump.◀
66
Do not use the washing mechanisms
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injuries if used improperly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
tion.
Only keep it in the closed original container
and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
Controls
Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐
trate and tap water; if needed, add antifreeze
according to the manufacturer instructions.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐
centrate and antifreeze and do not fill in pure
water; this could damage the washer system.
Do not mix window washing concentrate from
different manufacturers; this could cause the
washer nozzles to clog.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic, 6-gear
In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears
can also be shifted manually using Steptronic,
refer to page 68.
Parking the vehicle
Secure the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐
gine running, move the selector lever to posi‐
tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, the
vehicle will begin moving.◀
Disengaging the remote control
To remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, first move the selector lever to position P
and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove
the remote control from the ignition lock, refer
to page 59.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
The recommended minimum filling quantity is
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
67
Controls
Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
rear wheels are locked.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
The selector lever position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the
brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐
wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.
Press on the brake pedal until you
start driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.◀
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left.
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag‐
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving
Controls
Activating the M/S manual mode
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
shift down if the engine speed is too high. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ When the shift paddles on the steering
wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐
matic mode, the transmission switches to
manual mode.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle +.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle –.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
shift down if the engine speed is too high. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Overriding selector lever lock
If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐
though the ignition is switched on, the brake is
depressed, and the button on the selector
lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be
overridden:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐
ate or shift gears for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,
manual mode remains active.
4. Using the screwdriver from the tool kit, re‐
fer to page 249, press the red lever while
moving the selector lever to the desired
position with the button pressed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
69
Controls
Driving
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic, 8-gear
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the
transmission position P is engaged; otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.
Engaging transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Engaging transmission positions D, R,
N
The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged after the engine is
switched off if the remote control remains in
the ignition lock. This function can be used in
an automatic car wash, refer to page 263, for
example. P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes.
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically when the following
conditions are met:
▷ The driver's door is opened while the en‐
gine is running, the safety belt is not fas‐
tened and neither the brake pedal nor the
accelerator is activated.
▷ The engine is switched off unless N is en‐
gaged and the remote control is in the igni‐
tion lock.
▷ The remote control is removed from the ig‐
nition lock.
70
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
When shifting out of P or into R, simultane‐
ously push the unlock button 1.
The engaged transmission position is dis‐
played on the selector lever.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Engaging transmission position P
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving
Controls
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission
does not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument panel, followed by the current gear.
Ending the Sport program/manual
mode
Press button P.
Push the selector lever to the right.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to
quickly change gears since both hands can re‐
main on the steering wheel.
▷ If the shift paddles on the steering wheel
are used to shift gears while in automatic
mode D, the transmission temporarily
switches to manual mode.
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐
ate or shift gears for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode D.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
With the transmission position M/S selected,
the manual mode remains active.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Activating manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
shift down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
71
Controls
Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Displays
Controls
Displays
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Odometer, external
temperature display, clock
Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the ex‐
ternal temperature, refer to page 77.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Time, external temperature display
Set the time, refer to page 77.
External temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
the increased danger of ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on
roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Odometer and trip odometer
1
Knob in the instrument cluster
2
External temperature display and clock
3
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
Knob in the instrument cluster
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time,
external temperature and odometer are
displayed.
If you still want to view the time, external tem‐
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni‐
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
73
Controls
Displays
Tachometer
Engine oil temperature
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐
perature end. Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 246.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
is in the middle or in the right half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
diately and allow it to cool down.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Check the oil level, refer to page 243.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. You
can check whether you are currently driving in
an efficient and environmentally-friendly man‐
ner.
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may cause the display
to vary.
The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates
the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 228.
Range
After the reserve range is reached:
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Displays
Controls
▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the com‐
puter.
To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐
fer to page 77.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
Information in detail
The message appears continuously below a
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range below
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
▷ No information.
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and
the engine was switched off manually are not
included in the average speed calculations.
Computer
Displaying information on the
instrument panel
With the trip computer, refer to page 76, you
can have the average speed displayed for an
additional distance.
To reset the average speed: press the button
on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐
onds.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which
the engine is running.
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
The average consumption is computed based
on the distance traveled since the last time the
computer was reset.
Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
You can have the average consumption for an‐
other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
Overview of the information
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever displays the information on the in‐
strument cluster in the following order:
▷ Range.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. You
can check whether you are currently driving in
an efficient and environmentally-friendly man‐
ner.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
75
Controls
Displays
Displays on the Control Display
▷ Trip distance.
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
Both displays show:
1. "Vehicle Info"
▷ Average speed.
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
▷ Average fuel consumption and
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Displays on the "Onboard info":
Resetting the trip computer
Resetting all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information
Operating concept
▷ Range.
▷ Distance to destination.
▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination
was entered in the navigation system, refer
to page 146.
Certain settings and information can only be
called up when the ignition is switched on. A
number of settings cannot be made while driv‐
ing.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
1
▷ Selecting the display.
▷ Departure time.
▷ Trip duration.
76
Button for:
▷ Setting values.
2
Button for:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Displays
▷ Confirming the selected display or set
values.
▷ Calling up computer information 75.
Symbol
Function
With the lights switched on:
Controls
Units of measure
The units for fuel consumption, route/distance,
temperature, and pressure can be changed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Dimming instrument lighting,
refer to page 89
Calling up Check Control, refer
to page 82
Checking the engine oil level,
refer to page 243
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the time, refer to
page 77
Clock
Setting the time
Setting the date, refer to
page 78
Viewing service requirement
display, refer to page 80
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
time format below.
1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa‐
nied by the time and the word "SET".
Exiting displays
The external temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
2. Press button 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
77
Controls
Displays
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
3. "Time:"
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via the iDrive
1.
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the control‐
ler.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed, and then press the
controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
2. "Settings"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, Personal Profile, refer to
page 32.
Setting the time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Setting the date
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
2. "Time/Date"
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Displays
symbol appears in the display, accompa‐
nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
Controls
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same
way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Settings on the Control
Display
Language
Setting the language
Via the iDrive
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Language:"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 28.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
79
Controls
Displays
Brightness
Setting the brightness
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service
specialist.
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, the ba‐
sic setting can be adjusted.
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the distance remaining or the due date for
that operation in the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 60.
2. "Control display"
2. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the ap‐
propriate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "SERVICE
INFO".
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Service requirements
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individ‐
ual service items.
Displays
Symbol
Function
Service requirements
Engine oil
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed
briefly immediately after you start the engine
or switch on the ignition.
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Displays
Symbol
Controls
Function
3.
"Service required"
Roadworthiness test
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
Additional information can be displayed on
each entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
Front brake pads
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
Rear brake pads
Symbols
Description
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
Brake fluid
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. First the data for the next maintenance
are displayed.
Entering dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Detailed information on service
requirements
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
set correctly, refer to page 78.
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1. "Vehicle Info"
1. "Vehicle Info"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Service required"
2. "Vehicle status"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
81
Controls
Displays
Indicator/warning lamps
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjust‐
ment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or le‐
gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your service cen‐
ter before a service due date.
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
The symbol indicates that Check Control
messages have been stored. The Check Con‐
trol messages can be displayed later.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐
tems monitored.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal
and text messages at the top of the Control
Display.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Con‐
trol Display in combination with a symbol in the
instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
a fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Displays
Symbols
accompanied by the words "CHECK CON‐
TROL".
The following functions can be selected within
the supplementary text message, depending
on the Check Control message.
▷
Controls
"Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷
"Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
2. Press button 2.
If there is no Check Control message, this
is indicated by "CHECK OK“. If a Check
Control message has been stored, the cor‐
responding lamp comes on. It is accompa‐
nied by a text message on the Control Dis‐
play.
Press the computer button in the turn signal
lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified.
They cannot be hidden.
If several malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,
they are stored and can be displayed again
later.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the ap‐
propriate symbol appears in the display,
3. Press button 1 to check for other mes‐
sages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the external tem‐
perature and the time.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that were displayed during a
trip are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Speed limit
Entry of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a Check Control message to be
issued.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
83
Controls
Displays
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops
below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Lamps
Controls
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
off automatically in the following switch set‐
tings:
0,
,
Parking lamps
: the vehicle lamps light
Switch position
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
At a glance
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 87.
Low beams
with the ignition switched
Switch position
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lights
1
Automatic headlamp control / Adaptive
Light Control / High-beam Assistant / wel‐
come lamps / daytime running lights
2
Lamps off / daytime running lights
3
Parking lamps / daytime running lights
4
Low beams/welcome lamps
5
Fog lights
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position
or
: the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating the welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
Parking lights/low beams,
headlight control
General information
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is switched
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
85
Controls
Lamps
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the ignition is switched off, if the lights are
switched off and the headlight flasher is
switched on.
Setting the duration
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
tion 0,
and
. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lamps light up in po‐
sition
.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Activating/deactivating
3. "Pathway light.: s"
In some countries, driving with daytime run‐
ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐
time running lights cannot be deactivated in
these cases.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position
: the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
LED next to the symbol lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when
you switch on the front fog lamps.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
86
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during
turning, up to a certain speed one of the two
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Lamps
front fog lamps is switched on as a turning
lamp. This provides improved illumination of
the area inside the curve.
Left and right roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
Controls
Activating
Switch position
on.
Controls
with the ignition switched
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps
are active.
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lights drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly
long periods of time; otherwise, the battery
might not have enough power to start the en‐
gine.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
to the pressure point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunc‐
tioning or has failed. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
High-beams/roadside
parking lights
The concept
When the lights are switched on, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1. Turn the light switch to
.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn indicator lever in the direc‐
tion of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The high beams are
switched on and off automatically.
1
High-beams
2
Headlamp flasher
3
Roadside parking lamps
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
87
Controls
Lamps
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
beams.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
Activating/deactivating via iDrive
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
1. "Settings"
▷ If the sensor view field is dirty.
The view field of the sensor is located on
the front of the interior rearview mirror.
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
Clean the sensor view field with a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Fog lights
Front fog lamps
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The low beams must be switched on.
System limits
up.
Personal responsibility
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐
ment of when to use the high beams. There‐
fore, manually switch off the high beams in sit‐
uations where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
88
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 86, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the fog
lamps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Lamps
Instrument lighting
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Controls
To avoid draining the battery, all lights inside
the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
refer to page 59.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis‐
play, accompanied by the brightness set‐
ting and the word "SET".
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press the button.
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the de‐
sired brightness level.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: briefly press the button.
Reading lights
Press the button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.
Danger of burns
Do not reach into the opening of the
lamps; otherwise, there is a risk of burns.◀
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the external tem‐
perature and the time.
Interior lights
Ambient lighting
Depending on the equipment, the interior light‐
ing can be set individually for some lights.
Selecting the color scheme
General information
1. "Settings"
The interior lights, footwell lights, cargo area
lights, and courtesy lights are controlled auto‐
matically.
2. "Lighting"
The LEDs for the courtesy lights are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
89
Controls
Safety
Safety
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Airbags
1
Front airbags
3
Side airbags
2
Head airbags
4
Knee airbag
Front airbags
Head airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Safety
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
Controls
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐
gered.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
and do not attach holders or cables such
as for navigation instruments and mobile
phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
sives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
which could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are activated or deactivated accord‐
ingly by the system.
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
mirror shows the current status of the front
passenger airbags, deactivated or activated,
refer to Front passenger airbag indicator lamp
below.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
91
Controls
Safety
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to page 54.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that occupation of the seat
cushion can be detected correctly:
▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion
padding, ball mats or other items to the
passenger seat unless they are specifically
recommended by BMW.
▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐
senger seat if a child restraint fixing system
is mounted on the seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
92
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty.
The airbags on the front
passenger side are not acti‐
vated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Most child seats are detected by the system,
Especially the child seats required by NHTSA
at the time that the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child seat, make sure that the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up. This indicates that the child seat has
been detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Safety
Operational readiness of airbag
system
Controls
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
When the ignition is switched on, refer
to page 60, the warning lamp comes on
briefly to indicate that the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioners are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
▷ The warning lamp does not light up after
the ignition is switched on.
▷ Warning light remains permanently on.
Have the airbag system checked without
delay if there is a malfunction
In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not func‐
tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe
accident occurs.◀
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
wheels, high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
The concept
2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
3.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
"Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
93
Controls
Safety
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Continued driving with a flat tire
1. "Vehicle Info"
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. "Vehicle status"
"Reset"
3.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A
message appears on the Control Dis‐
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Run-flat tires
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
94
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Safety
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Controls
Status indicator on the Control
Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
All wheels are green
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors the tire pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system issues a warn‐
ing if there is a significant loss of pressure in
one or more tires. Sensors in the tire valves
measure the tire pressure.
Notes
The system is active and issues warnings in
case of deviations from the tire inflation pres‐
sures stored last.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Tire damage caused by external influen‐
ces
▷ Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
Sudden tire damage caused by external influ‐
ences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and issues warnings when the tire
pressure deviates from the tire inflation
pressures stored last.
To operate the system, also note the additional
information and instructions contained under
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 232.
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
tem is being reset.
Functional requirements
A message appears on the Control Display.
The system must have been reset while the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of pressure loss is not ensured.
The wheels are gray
Reset the system after adjusting the tire infla‐
tion pressure and after changing a tire or
wheel.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
Possible reasons for this:
▷ TPM is being reset.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency.
▷ Malfunction.
Status information
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
"TPM"
The status is displayed.
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the
actual values read; they may vary depending
on driving style or weather conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
95
Controls
Safety
Resetting the system
Reset the system after adjusting the tire infla‐
tion pressure and every time a tire or wheel is
changed.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
5. Start the system reset with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a short trip at over 30 km/h, the set tire
inflation pressures are adopted as target val‐
ues. The system reset is completed as you
drive, and can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the reset is continued
automatically. On the Control Display, the tires
are shown in green and "TPM active" is dis‐
played again.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, the reset is continued auto‐
matically.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is re‐
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis‐
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is
shown.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
Low tire pressure message
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The small warning light lights up yel‐
low and the large warning light lights
up red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ The system was not reset. The system
therefore issues warnings in case of devia‐
tions from the tire inflation pressures
stored last.
96
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. Reset the system.
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Safety
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Message when the system was not
reset
The yellow warning light lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
The system may not have been reset
although a wheel was changed.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 96.
System limits
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g., it may identify a tire as flat
in spite of the fact that the tire is filled to the
correct inflation pressure.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
of the tire. An increase in the tire temperature,
e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increases
the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure
Controls
decreases when the tire temperature drops. In
case of severe temperature drops, this behav‐
ior may lead to a warning on account of the de‐
fined warning limits.
Malfunction
The small warning light flashes in yel‐
low and then lights up continuously;
the larger warning light comes on in
yellow. On the Control Display, the
tires are shown in gray and a message ap‐
pears. No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if neces‐
sary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the
system again.
The small warning light flashes in yel‐
low and then lights up continuously;
the larger warning light comes on in
yellow. On the Control Display, the
tires are shown in gray and a message ap‐
pears. No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
97
Controls
Safety
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv‐
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres‐
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the in‐
stallation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en‐
sure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving stability control systems
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Do not reduce the additional safety margin
with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is
a risk of an accident.◀
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
Electronic brake-force
distribution
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in bends.
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Brake assistant
Deactivating DSC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the short‐
est possible braking distance during full brak‐
ing. This system utilizes all of the benefits pro‐
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
99
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti‐
vated together.
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC
In the interest of better forward momentum,
brake intervention is performed in the manner
of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin
quickly even if DSC is deactivated.
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited.
Activating DSC
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster go out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed.
DSC deactivated:
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF appears in the instrument
cluster.
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in
which forward momentum is optimized.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off
in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for
DSC OFF lights up.
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving stability control systems
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster go out.
Controls
the front and rear axle depending on the driv‐
ing situation and prevailing road conditions.
Hill Descent Control HDC
The concept
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed.
DTC activated:
The indicator lamp lights up and
TRACTION appears in the instrument
cluster.
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. Without requiring brake ap‐
plication, the vehicle moves at slightly more
than twice walking speed.
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill at below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. twice walking speed and keeps it
constant.
While you are actively braking, the system is
on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Increasing or reducing speed
The speed can be changed in the range from
roughly twice walking speed to approx.
15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the accelerator or
brake pedal lightly.
DTC is activated.
Performance Control
A target speed within the same range can be
specified using the lever of the cruise control.
Performance Control enhances the agility of
your vehicle. To enhance performance during
sporty driving, the rear wheel on the inside of
the curve is braked while the resulting braking
effect is largely compensated by engine inter‐
vention.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv‐
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to
1
Increasing speed
2
Decreasing speed
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
101
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Drive-off assistant
Activating HDC
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Press the button; the LED above the
button lights up.
Driving off without delay
Deactivating HDC
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
Press the button again; the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Servotronic
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
automatically.
The concept
Using HDC
HDC can be used in every driving position.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels depending on the
speed at which you are driving.
Power steering provides strong support at low
speeds, which means that less effort is needed
to turn the wheels. Power steering support
lessens as your speed increases.
Malfunction
1
Display for target speed
2
HDC display
The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Malfunction
If the HDC display goes out during HDC opera‐
tion or is not displayed: HDC is not available
due to high brake temperatures or DSC has
failed.
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving comfort
Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
One lever for all functions
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The speed specified using the lever on the
steering column is maintained.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Do not use cruise control
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
stant speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
cle and cause an accident.◀
1
Storing and maintaining speed or acceler‐
ating
2
Storing and maintaining speed or deceler‐
ating
3
Deactivating cruise control
4
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the
resistance point.
The car's current speed is stored and main‐
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking ef‐
fect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys‐
tem will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed to the point
of resistance, the desired speed increases
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
103
Controls
Driving comfort
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Accelerating slightly:
Warning light
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
The warning lamp comes on when
cruise control has been deactivated
as a result of DSC intervention, for
example. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired
speed is displayed.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled to the resist‐
ance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is re‐
duced by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is ach‐
ieved.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored
speed is resumed and maintained.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When driving stability control systems in‐
tervene.
▷ When selector lever position N is engaged
or transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Push the lever upwards or downwards, ar‐
row 3.
The displays in the speedometer go out.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti‐
vated when:
▷ The brakes are applied.
1
Stored speed
2
Selected speed is displayed briefly
▷ Selector lever position N is engaged or
transmission position D is disengaged.
If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears
briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐
erate the system.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
Call up Check Control messages, refer to
page 83.
▷ When DSC or ABS is intervening.
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving comfort
Malfunction
Controls
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
The warning light lights up. The sys‐
tem is malfunctioning or has failed.
A message appears on the Control
Display. More information, refer to page 82.
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Park Distance Control PDC
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The concept
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, for in‐
stance:
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the backup camera, refer to page 107, can be
switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap‐
proach to an object in front of or behind your
vehicle is announced by:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
located outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.◀
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
105
Controls
Driving comfort
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, shift the selector lever into posi‐
tion R.
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Volume
Switching on/off manually
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 167.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on
the Control Display. Objects that are farther
away are displayed on the Control Display be‐
fore a signal tone sounds.
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected behind the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the rear speakers.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
nal is sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐
prox. 3 seconds:
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
vated.
If the last image selected was the rearview
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
PDC:
"Switch off rear view camera"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving comfort
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is dis‐
played. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Controls
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
Malfunction
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, shift the selector lever into posi‐
tion R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
A Check Control message, refer to page 82, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap‐
pear in shaded form on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Rear view camera
Press the button.
The concept
▷ On: the LED lights up.
The rear view camera assists you when park‐
ing and maneuvering in reverse. To accom‐
plish this, the region behind your vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam‐
era via the iDrive, refer to page 106.
System limits
Assistance functions
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the backup
camera.◀
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Functional requirement
▷ Rear view camera is switched on.
▷ Tailgate is completely closed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
107
Controls
Driving comfort
Parking using pathway and turning
lines
Pathway lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning
lines lead into the margins of the parking
space.
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera when the transmission is in
reverse.
▷ Help estimate the required amount of
space when parking and maneuvering on a
flat road surface.
▷ Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer
to page 109.
Turning lines
Obstacle marking
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera.
▷ Show the path of the smallest turning cir‐
cle on a flat road surface.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned, only
one turning line is displayed.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer
to page 109.
108
▷ Three-dimensionally shaped markings can
be displayed in the image of the rear view
camera.
Their color gradation corresponds to the mark‐
ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance
to the object pictured.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving comfort
Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer
to page 109.
Controls
Camera
Activating assistance functions
Several assistance functions can be active at
the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis‐
played.
The lens of the rearview camera is under the
grasping lip of the tailgate.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is dis‐
played. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Brightness
With the rear view camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rear view camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
109
Controls
Climate
Climate
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Automatic climate control
1
Manual air distribution
9
2
Maximum cooling
3
Temperature, left
10 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
4
AUTO program
11 Switching cooling function on/off manually
5
Manual air flow rate, AUTO intensity
12 Rear window defroster
6
Display
13 Seat heating, right 48
7
Automatic recirculated air control/recircu‐
lated air mode
14 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear
8
ALL program
15 Seat heating, left 48
110
Temperature, right
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Climate
Note
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously worsens.◀
Controls
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the external
temperature.
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re‐
gardless of the external temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
Comfortable interior climate
For almost all conditions, the AUTO program
4 offers the optimum air distribution and air
flow rate, refer to AUTO program below. Select
a comfortable interior temperature only.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most of these settings are stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use, Personal Profile
settings, refer to page 33.
Manual air distribution
Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:
▷
Windows.
▷
Upper body region.
▷
Footwell.
The programs can be combined as necessary.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the de‐
sired temperature.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recircu‐
lated-air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the windshield, side windows,
upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program in such a way that window
condensation is prevented as much as possi‐
ble.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐
matic control of the air volume and air distribu‐
tion can be adjusted:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
111
Controls
Climate
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air volume, manual
A button on the steering wheel can be used to
quickly switch between recirculated air mode
and the previous setting.
ALL program
Press the button.
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control.
The air volume of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Automatic recirculated air mode/
recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐
matically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off
the recirculated-air mode and press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto
the windshield.
112
Via the button on the steering wheel
The current temperature setting for
the driver's side is transferred to the front pas‐
senger side.
If the temperature setting is changed on the
driver's side, the temperature on the front pas‐
senger side changes as well.
The program is switched off if the setting is
changed on the front passenger side or the
button is pressed again.
Defrosting and defogging windows
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 134, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Climate
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press and hold the left button or, with
the setting at the lowest level, press
the left button.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win‐
dow defroster if it is switched on.
When the automatic climate control is
switched off, the supply of outside air is sus‐
pended. If the air quality deteriorates or the
window fogs over, switch the system back on
and increase the air flow rate.
Switching on
Press any button, except for the buttons for
the ALL program or rear window heating.
Controls
Draft-free ventilation
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
coming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
Your service center replaces this combined fil‐
ter during routine maintenance.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem‐
peratures.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing a preset switch-on time. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, refrain from activating it
twice in succession without allowing the bat‐
tery to be recharged in normal operation be‐
tween use.
Ventilation
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
1
Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2
Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
2. "Climate"
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direc‐
tion, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the
sun.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
113
Controls
Climate
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting activation times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Set the desired time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐
vated.
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Interior equipment
Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Universal garage door
opener
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the operating instructions of
the system being operated, the system
is generally compatible with the universal ga‐
rage door opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of the
Gentex Corporation.
Controls on the interior rearview
mirror
The concept
The universal garage door opener can be used
to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐
led systems, such as garage door drives or
lighting systems. The universal garage door
opener replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror must be programmed
for the desired functions. The hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system is needed for the pro‐
gramming procedure.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the Universal Garage Door
Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals, or objects in the range of movement of
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there
is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for security reasons.
1
LED
2
Buttons
3
Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐
gramming.
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
programmed settings of the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror are deleted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
115
Controls
Interior equipment
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐
tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1
to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the particular
hand-held transmitter.
In systems with an alternating-code system,
the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
tem must be additionally synchronized.
4. Press the button of the desired function on
the hand-held transmitter and the button
being programmed on the interior rearview
mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes
slowly at first.
The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the aid of a second person.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, re‐
lease both buttons. Rapid flashing indi‐
cates that the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror has been programmed.
2. Program the corresponding button on the
interior rearview mirror as described.
If the LED does not flash faster after
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior rearview mirror and the handheld transmitter and repeat the step. Multi‐
ple trials at different distances may be nec‐
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
trials.
6. To program additional functions on other
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
Please obtain additional information on syn‐
chronization in the operating instructions of
the system being set up.
Synchronization:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐
ton on the system being set up. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Press and hold the button on the interior
rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
then release it. Repeat this step up to three
times if necessary to complete the syn‐
chronization procedure. When synchroni‐
zation is completed, the programmed func‐
tion is executed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
The systems can be operated with the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror.
1. Switch on the ignition.
Special characteristics of alternatingcode radio systems
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐
tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from
the memory buttons.
If the system cannot be operated after re‐
peated programming, check whether the sys‐
tem to be operated uses an alternating-code
system.
Read the operating instructions of the system
or press and hold the programmed button on
the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the
interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first
and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds,
the system is equipped with an alternatingcode system. This flashing LED pattern re‐
peats itself for approx. 20 seconds.
116
The required distance depends on the par‐
ticular hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the memory button of the universal
garage door opener.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED
flashes rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐
prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Interior equipment
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐
tance and repeat the step. If programming
was aborted by the hand-held transmitter,
hold down the memory button and press
and release the button on the hand-held
transmitter several times for 2 seconds.
Controls
Digital compass
Controls
Prior to operation
Before operating a unit with the Universal
Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no
people, animals, or objects in the range of
movement of the system; otherwise, there is a
risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀
1
Adjustment button
2
Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating concept
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐
tion switched on. When you are within the re‐
ception range of the system, press and hold
the button until the function is initiated. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up
continuously while the radio signal is being
transmitted.
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen. The following adjustment op‐
tions are displayed one after the other, de‐
pending on how long the adjustment button is
pressed:
Deleting stored functions
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
steering.
Press the right and left buttons on the interior
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions
cannot be deleted individually.
▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to the
vehicle's geographic location so that the com‐
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
117
Controls
Interior equipment
Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.
The number of the compass zone set is shown
in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐
sponding to the current location.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
onds to call up C. Then drive at least one
full circle at a maximum speed of
4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐
brated, the C is replaced by the compass
directions.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Right-hand/left-hand steering
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass is set for right-hand or
left-hand steering at the factory.
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
Setting the language
▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.
▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
change even if the direction of travel
changes.
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.
Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 sec‐
onds. Briefly press the adjustment button
again to switch between English "E" and Ger‐
man "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough
space to drive in a circle.
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Interior equipment
Controls
Sun visor
Lighter
Glare protection
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, press in the cigarette lighter 1.
Folding down
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Fold the sun visor down.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Folding up
Fold the sun visor up.
Glare protection from the side
Folding down
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways
to the side window.
Folding up
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Replace the lighter or socket cover after
use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter
socket or power socket could cause a short
circuit.◀
To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse or‐
der.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on
each sun visor. The mirror lighting comes on
when the cover is opened.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Connecting electrical
devices
Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to
the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory
as this could damage the battery.◀
Opening
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Pull cover 2 up.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
119
Controls
Interior equipment
Cargo area
Front center console
Cargo covers
Do not place objects on the covers
Do not place objects on the cover; if you
do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or
damage the cover.◀
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
To load bulky luggage, the covers can be re‐
moved.
Rear cover
Rear center console
1. Detach the securing straps from the tail‐
gate.
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it
back and out of the brackets, arrows 2.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In storage compartment under center
armrest
To access the socket: remove the cover.
Front cover
In cargo area
1. Push the cover up and out of the brackets
on both sides, arrow 1.
Fold open the cover.
120
2. Pull the cover back, up and out of the lat‐
eral brackets on both sides, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Interior equipment
Controls
Enlarging the cargo area
2. Engage the backrest in the desired posi‐
tion or fold it down.
General information
On the left side, the outer and center backrests
are adjusted jointly toward the front if both
backrests are engaged in the same lock-in po‐
sition.
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrests.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40-20-40.
The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different
positions between the comfort and transport
positions and they can be folded down.
In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted
back to the greatest possible angle and in the
transport position they are nearly vertical.
The backrests can be adjusted separately to‐
ward the rear. Note that the center backrest
cannot be tilted farther down than the left
backrest.
Adjusting only the center backrest
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system,
note the instructions, refer to page 54.
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that path of movement of the
backrests is clear. Especially when the middle
section is folded down, ensure that no one is
located in or reaches into the path of move‐
ment of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, in‐
juries or damage may result.◀
Observe the instructions concerning the
safety belt
Observe the instructions concerning the safety
belt, refer to page 48. Otherwise, personal pro‐
tection may be compromised.◀
Adjusting the outer backrests
1. Pull the loop, arrow.
2. Engage the backrest in the desired posi‐
tion or fold it down.
Folding the backrests back up
When the backrests are folded back up, they
engage in the transport position.
To set the desired backrest tilt or comfort po‐
sition, pull the lever of the left/right backrest or
the loop of the center backrest forward.
Locking the backrest
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀
Partition net
Firmly attach the partition net
1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to‐
ward the front.
Make sure that the partition net is firmly
attached; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
121
Controls
Interior equipment
The partition net can be attached behind the
front or rear seats.
Installation behind the rear seats
Before installing
1. If necessary, tilt the rear seat backrests for‐
ward and remove the front cargo cover, re‐
fer to page 120.
1. Remove the pouch with the partition net
from the storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel in the cargo area.
2. Fold open the cover caps 1 of the rear
brackets in the headliner to the point
where they engage.
2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐
roll it, and unfold it.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net 2 all the
way into the holders on both sides and
slide forward.
After use, fold and roll up the partition net
in the same manner and place it in the
pouch so that it can be stowed back under
the cargo floor panel.
Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles
do not rest on the rod elements.
3. Unfold the partition net to the point where
the rod elements engage.
Mounting eyes
Four mounting eyes are located on the back of
the rear seat backrests.
▷ Installation behind the front seats, ar‐
rows 1.
▷ Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2.
4. Attach the hooks 1 at the bottom of the re‐
taining straps into the eyelets on the rear
seat backrest, arrow, on both sides.
5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
sioning buckles.
Label
Ensure that the partition net is correctly posi‐
tioned, i.e., do not reverse front and back.
The partition net is labeled accordingly.
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Interior equipment
Installation behind the front seats
Controls
Cargo floor panel
Compartment in floor
Note the maximum permissible load
Do not exceed a maximum load of
55 lbs/25 kg in the storage compartment be‐
neath the cargo floor panel; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
Enlarging the cargo area.
2. Fold open the cover caps of the front
brackets in the headliner to the point
where they engage.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net all the
way into the holders on both sides and
slide forward.
To access the tool kit, for example, lift the stor‐
age compartment at the rear.
To lift, reach into the recess on the rear edge
of the storage compartment.
The storage compartment can be removed if
necessary.
Raising the cargo floor panel
4. Attach the hooks at the bottom of the re‐
taining straps into the upper eyelets on the
rear seat backrest on both sides.
5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
sioning buckles.
Removing
To remove and stow the partition net, proceed
in reverse order.
To fold up, press both release buttons, arrows.
Reach under the cargo floor panel on the left,
right and at the rear. Fold the panel up and for‐
ward, pressing it into the gap between the
cargo area floor and the rear seat backrest.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor
panel when it is upright.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel
when it is upright, do not press up or down on
it, and do not adjust the rear seat backrests;
otherwise, damage may result.◀
Before closing the tailgate, fold down the
cargo floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo
floor panel toward the rear, raising it up and out
of the gap.
The cargo floor panel can be removed if nec‐
essary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
123
Controls
Interior equipment
Lashing eyes
To secure pieces of luggage with nets or draw
straps, lashing eyes are available in the cargo
area, refer to page 137.
Multi-function hooks
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area, arrow.
Do not hang heavy items from the hooks
Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger
of objects flying about during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Ski and snowboard bag
General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Storage compartments
Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Glove compartment
Opening
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Pull the handle.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
compartment without securing them; other‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐
neuvers.◀
No non-slip mats on the dashboard
Do not use non-slip materials, such as
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be
damaged by the substances in the materials.◀
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
Port for importing and exporting data, such as
music collections, refer to page 181, on USB
devices.
Observe the following when connecting:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
125
Controls
Storage compartments
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
Adjusting
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect a USB hard drive.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest front
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a compartment with cupholders or
the cover for the snap-in adapter, depending
on the version.
Slide the center armrest into the desired posi‐
tion.
Center armrest, rear
Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to
page 207.
Opening
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
When folding up, push the center armrest
firmly back into the rear seat backrest.
Pull the center armrest upward.
Connection for an external
audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 186.
▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 187.
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Interior
▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 125.
▷ Compartments in the center console.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Bottle holders in the doors, cupholders, re‐
fer to page 127.
Cargo area
▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 137.
▷ Storage compartment under the cargo
floor panel, refer to page 123.
▷ Left and right storage compartments.
▷ Multi-function hook, refer to page 124.
Storage compartment package
Controls
space at the rear of the storage compart‐
ment for the partition net.
▷ Storage net next to the storage compart‐
ment on the right in the cargo area.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located at the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
For your comfort:
Cupholders
Interior
▷ Insertable cupholder, refer to page 128.
▷ Front center armrest, refer to page 126.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Retaining straps in the front door compart‐
ments.
▷ Rear center armrest with integrated cu‐
pholders.
Cargo area
▷ Retaining strap on the left side panel for
securing small items.
▷ Retaining straps on the cargo area floor.
▷ Insertable partition elements for the stor‐
age compartment under the cargo floor
panel, used to variably subdivide the stor‐
age compartment.
With partition net: arrange the partition ele‐
ments in such a way that there is enough
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
Front
▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
holder for 1-quart/1 liter bottles, for exam‐
ple.
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
the bottom slanted toward the front.
▷ In the center console.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
127
Controls
Storage compartments
Insertable cupholder
The insertable cupholder is located in the
compartment below the center armrest.
Insert the cupholder in the holder on the center
console.
Rear
▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
holder for 25-ounce/0.75 liter bottles, for
example.
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
the bottom slanted toward the front.
▷ In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Storage compartments
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
traction potential until after an initial breakingin period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Following part replacement
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speeds:
▷ 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, passengers and other road users may be
endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if
an accident occurs or during braking or evasive
maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may
enter the passenger compartment.◀
If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
the tailgate open:
▷ Drive moderately.
▷ Close all windows and the panoramic glass
sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Things to remember when driving
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐
age.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is the danger of getting burned.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
such as mobile phones without a direct con‐
nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's
passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi‐
cle electronics and mobile communication de‐
vices can interfere with each other. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation gener‐
ated during transmission will be discharged
from the vehicle interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving tips
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,
refer to page 239.
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to
6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
electrical systems and the transmission may
be damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Do not let your foot rest on the brake
pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.◀
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
133
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again when they are returned after being
removed, such as for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Hills
Therefore, traces of condensed water under
the vehicle are normal.
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
Driving on poor roads
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if necessary.
Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic
transmission, refer to page 68.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
134
BMW X1 combines an all-wheel drive system
with the advantages of a normal passenger car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth‐
erwise the vehicle may be damaged.◀
For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving; never take risks.
▷ Adjust speeds according to road condi‐
tions. The steeper and rougher the road
surface is, the lower the speed should be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
grades: the engine oil and coolant should
be filled nearly to the MAX mark.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
▷ Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to
page 101, on steep downhill grades.
▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐
cles and drive around these where possi‐
ble.
▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact
between the vehicle body and the ground.
The maximum ground clearance is 8 in‐
ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded
cargo.
▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum water height of 12 in‐
ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.
▷ After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to
dry the brakes.
▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐
vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer
to page 100, briefly.
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to ena‐
ble the driving stability control systems to
distribute the drive force to the individual
wheels.
After driving on poor roads
Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐
cle safety:
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
and mud from the vehicle body.
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels
and tires and check for damage.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
135
Driving tips
Loading
Loading
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and
increases the rate at which damage develops
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the cargo area
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Determining the load limit
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transport‐
ing a trailer to determine how this may re‐
duce the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Loading
Load
Driving tips
bump against the rear window while the
vehicle is in motion.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Cargo straps can be attached to two lash‐
ing eyes on the cargo area side panel, ar‐
rows 1, and two lashing eyes on the cargo
area rear panel, arrows 2.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as
low as possible, ideally directly behind the
backrests.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge
of the backrests.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 121, to
protect passengers. Make sure that ob‐
jects cannot penetrate the partition net.
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described
above; otherwise it may present a danger to
the occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
passenger compartment without securing
them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehi‐
cle weight or either of the approved axle loads,
as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard,
and may also place you in violation of traffic
safety laws.
▷ Place protective material around any
sharp-edged or pointed objects that could
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
137
Driving tips
Loading
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten
the heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure
cargo using the upper top tether, refer to
page 55, mounting points; otherwise, these
may become damaged.◀
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Rear luggage rack
Notes
Notes
A special rack system is available as an op‐
tional accessory.
A special rear rack is available as an optional
accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.
Anchorage points
Follow the installation instructions for the rear
rack.
The anchorage points are located on the roof
railing.
Anchorage points
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Attachment
Follow the installation instructions for the roofmounted luggage rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the panoramic glass
sunroof.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
The anchorage points are under the covers in
the bumper. Remove the covers, refer to
page 262.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in
area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage se‐
curely, for instance using lashing straps.
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Saving fuel
Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 247, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Closing the windows and
panoramic glass sunroof
Driving with the panoramic glass sunroof and
windows open results in increased air resist‐
ance and raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure, refer to page 232, at least twice
a month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Remove attached parts
following use
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or
rear luggage racks after use.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel
consumption and minimizes wear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
139
Driving tips
Saving fuel
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function
The Automatic Start/Stop Function of your ve‐
hicle automatically switches off the engine
during a stop. Additional information on the
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function, refer to
page 61.
If the engine is stopped and then started again,
fuel consumption and emissions drop com‐
pared to an engine that runs permanently.
Stopping the engine even for just a few sec‐
onds can result in savings.
Use of this system can cause premature wear
on certain vehicle components.
In addition, fuel consumption depends on
other factors as well, such as driving style, road
conditions, maintenance, and environmental
factors.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your
service center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 247.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports the driver in achieving high
fuel economy. Engine control and comfort
functions, such as the climate control system,
are adjusted accordingly.
In addition, situation-related information can
be displayed that helps the driver achieve
lower fuel consumption.
The resulting range extension can be dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Activating ECO PRO
Press the button; the LED above the
button lights up.
ECO PRO appears in the instrument cluster
and DSC is activated if necessary.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
are not actually needed.
140
After activation, ECO PRO and the bonus
range are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Saving fuel
ECO PRO bonus range
The vehicle's cruising range can be extended
by adjusting your driving style.
This extended range can be displayed as a bo‐
nus range in the instrument cluster.
The bonus range is indicated in the range dis‐
play.
The bonus range is automatically reset after
refueling.
Driving tips
To achieve better fuel economy, the actual
temperature may vary slightly from the set
temperature and the passenger compartment
may be heated or cooled more slowly.
Deactivating ECO PRO
Press the button again.
The LED above the button and the
ECO PRO display in the instrument cluster go
out.
Driving style
ECO PRO displays the efficiency of the current
driving style in the instrument cluster.
▷ ECO PRO not highlighted: efficient driving
style.
▷ ECO PRO highlighted: adjust your driving
style, for example by accelerating less
quickly.
To drive efficiently:
▷ Accelerate less quickly.
▷ Brake in advance.
▷ Reduce speed to the ECO PRO speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
▷ Automatic transmission: shift from S to D,
or avoid shifting manually.
ECO PRO tip
Situation-related tips that indicate measures to
achieve optimum fuel economy can be dis‐
played.
A reminder is displayed when the ECO PRO
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h is exceeded.
Displaying the ECO PRO tip
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "ECO PRO Tips"
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is adjusted for optimum fuel
economy.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Navigation
Navigation system
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Navigation data
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information is displayed on the data ver‐
sion.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Current navigation data and the authorization
code are available from your service center.
General information
Entries in stationary vehicle
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐
ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.◀
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available.
Opening the navigation system
Performing an update
1.
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
Press the button on the controller.
2. "Navigation"
The navigation system can also be called
up directly using the button on the con‐
troller.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
▷ Remove the medium with the navigation
data after the update.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
tion DVD.
4. Change the DVD if necessary.
After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display.
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Navigation system
Navigation
Viewing the status
1. Open "Options".
2. "Navigation update"
Removing navigation DVD
1.
Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
145
Navigation
Destination entry
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.◀
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 25.
Stored town/city and street names can be
called up quickly.
At a glance
In entering your destination you can select
from the following options:
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
▷ Select the destination from the address
book, refer to page 148.
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 149.
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 149.
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
page 151.
▷ Using the home address as the destina‐
tion, refer to page 149.
▷ If the existing entries should not be
changed, the entries for the state/province
and town/city can be skipped.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the
town/city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1.
Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to
page 152.
▷ Destination entry via the Concierge serv‐
ice, refer to page 151.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 24.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐
ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
146
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination entry
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
Navigation
If there are several streets with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/
city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the
destination city/town
2. Highlight the town/city.
The desired street does not exist in the speci‐
fied city/town because it belongs to another
part of the city/town.
3. Select the town/city.
1. "Navigation"
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2.
Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the state/province cur‐
rently displayed.
All streets of the selected state/province
are offered. The associated town/city is
displayed after the street name.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
147
Navigation
Destination entry
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
1. "Navigation"
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add, refer to page 153, a destination as a
further destination.
2. "Map"
3.
"Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Address book
Create contacts, refer to page 218.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
2. "Address book"
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations in the contacts.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer
to page 219.
8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add
position to contact"
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired,
with "A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination entry
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last
name.
Navigation
Calling up the last destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 211.
2. "Last destinations"
1. "Navigation"
4. "Start guidance"
2. "Address book"
3. Select the destination.
Editing the destination
3. "Home"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
4. "Start guidance"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
Last destinations
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.
Special destinations
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
General information
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐
tion on specific Points of Interest may have
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
149
Navigation
Destination entry
changed; for example, gas stations might not
be in operation.
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 153.
Opening the search for Points of
Interest
"Start search": if a search term is not entered,
the search is repeated with the previous
search term.
Selection of Points of Interest, such as hotels
or tourist attractions.
Category search
1. "Navigation"
1. "Category search"
2. "Points of Interest"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select the search function.
3. Select or enter the town/city.
4. "Category"
Online Search
5. Select the category.
1. "Google™ Local Search"
6. "Category details"
2. Select a special destination.
3.
For some Points of Interest, multiple cate‐
gory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search
7. "Start search"
1. "A-Z search"
A list of the Points of Interest is displayed.
2. "Town/City"
8. Select a special destination.
3. Select or enter the town/city.
Details are displayed.
4. "Category"
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
5. Select the category.
If a phone number is available, a connec‐
tion can be established if necessary.
6. "Category details"
For some Points of Interest, multiple cate‐
gory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
7. "Keyword"
Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 153.
8. Enter the keyword.
A list of the Points of Interest is displayed.
9. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connec‐
tion can be established if necessary.
10.
9.
Select the symbol.
Display of Points of Interest
List of Points of Interest: Points of Interest are
arranged by distance and appear with a direc‐
tional arrow pointing to the special destination.
In the splitscreen, Points of Interest of the se‐
lected category are displayed in the map view
as symbols. The display depends on the scale
of the map and the category.
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination entry
Navigation
Destination entry via the Concierge
service
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 221.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
Specifying the street
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
If the system does not recognize the street,
one of the following pieces of information is
displayed:
Displaying Points of Interest in the
map
▷ A street name in the vicinity.
To display symbols of the Points of Interest in
the map view:
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
▷ The county.
1. "Navigation"
Additional functions
2. "Map"
Additional functions are available on the inter‐
active map after the controller is pressed:
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
▷
The current position of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the map.
3.
"Interactive map"
Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 153.
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷ To change the scale: turn the control‐
ler.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for
Points of Interest is started.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
151
Navigation
Destination entry
Destination entry by voice
Entering a town/city separately
The town/city can be said as a complete word.
General information
With the destination entry menu displayed:
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 27.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice operation
and iDrive.
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
Saying the entries
▷ The town/city, street, and house number
can be entered using a single command.
▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and
intersections can be said as whole words
or spelled in the language of the system,
refer to page 79.
Example: to enter a destination in a US
state as a whole word, the system lan‐
guage must be English.
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐
gation data in use and the country and lan‐
guage settings.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/
cities may be suggested.
5. Select a location:
▷ Select a recommended town/
city: ›Yes‹.
▷ Select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹.
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance,
entry 2.
▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in
a list and displayed as one location followed by
an ellipsis.
Entering the address in a command
1. Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐
try 2.
1.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
If necessary, individually name the sepa‐
rate components of the address, e.g., the
town/city.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination entry
Navigation
Entering a house number separately
Entering intermediate destinations
Depending on the data in the navigation sys‐
tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can
be entered.
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations
can be entered for a trip.
1. ›House number‹
2. Select the type of destination entry.
2. Say the house number.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Starting destination guidance
›Start guidance‹
1. "Enter new destination"
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is located at the desired loca‐
tion in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Planning a trip with
intermediate destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned with several intermediate
destinations.
1. "Navigation"
1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
tered, highlight the first destination.
If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
started, the first destination is skipped.
2. "Start guidance"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
4.
Starting the trip
"Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
This symbol marks the active leg of the
trip.
Storing a trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter a name for the trip.
4. "OK"
Selecting a stored trip
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
153
Navigation
Destination entry
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2.
"Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options
1. "Map"
2.
"Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Deleting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Highlight the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
Opening the last trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination guidance
Navigation
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
Starting destination
guidance
▷ The route criteria can be changed when
the destination is entered and during desti‐
nation guidance.
1. "Navigation"
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when
planning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
2. Make a destination entry, refer to
page 146.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
The route is shown on the Control Display.
The distance to the destination/intermediate
destination and the estimated time of arrival
are displayed in the map view.
Terminating destination
guidance
▷ The recommended route may differ from
the route you would take based on per‐
sonal experience.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 161.
Changing the route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
1. "Navigation"
3.
2. "Map"
4. Select the criterion:
3.
"Guidance"
"Route preference"
▷
"Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads.
▷
"ECO PRO route" or "Efficient
route": optimized combination of the
fastest and shortest possible route.
4. "Stop guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
155
Navigation
▷
Destination guidance
"Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress
will be.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive destination guidance.
The individual suggestions are high‐
lighted in color.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in
direction.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direc‐
tion.
Lane information
On multilane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However,
another lane change may be needed
shortly.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Displaying list of route sections
When destination guidance is activated, a list
of route sections can be displayed. The driving
distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for
each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight route section.
The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ List of route sections.
Bypassing a section of the
route
▷ Map view, refer to page 157.
Calculate a new route for a route section.
Arrow view
1. "Navigation"
▷ Arrow view.
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
2. "Route information"
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
▷ Street name of the currently traveled
street.
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination guidance
6.
3. "New route for"
Navigation
Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of
kilometers within which you would like to
return to the original route.
5. Press the controller.
Switching spoken instructions on/off
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Navigation"
Resuming the original route
2. "Map"
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
3.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation
The remaining range is calculated, and if
needed gas stations along the route are dis‐
played.
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐
tion on individual Points of Interest may have
changed; for example, gas stations might not
be in operation.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
The location of the gas station is displayed
on the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
"Voice instructions"
Repeating a spoken instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 24, for quick ac‐
cess.
Map view
Selecting the map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
157
Navigation
Destination guidance
At a glance
Status fields
Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the
function bar:
1
Function bar
2
Route section with traffic obstruction
3
Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
4
Planned route
5
Current location
6
Upper status field
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
7
Lower status field
Change the route criteria.
Symbol
Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Search for a special destina‐
tion.
Lines in the map
Streets and routes are displayed in different
colors and styles depending on their classifica‐
tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry
connections. Country borders are indicated by
thin lines.
Display traffic bulletins.
Open the interactive map.
Set the map view.
Change the scale.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indi‐
cate route sections with traffic obstructions,
depending on the map scale. The direction of
the triangles indicates the direction of the ob‐
struction.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of
the obstruction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction.
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 159.
To change to the function bar, move the con‐
troller to the left.
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1.
Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination guidance
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the control‐
ler in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The entire route between the current
location and the destination is displayed on the
map.
Navigation
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
5. Select the map view.
▷ "Arrow display"
▷ "Map facing north"
Settings for the map view
▷ "Map direction of travel"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
▷ "Map view with perspective"
1. "Navigation"
▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐
ways are displayed three dimension‐
ally.
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
▷ "Position"
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
4. "Settings"
5. To set the map view:
▷ "Day/night mode"
6. To change the scale: select the split
screen and turn the controller.
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions.
Traffic bulletins
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
At a glance
▷ "Satellite images"
Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images are displayed at scales of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
Prominent areas that are contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map in
3D.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins, refer to page 160.
Symbols for the Points of Interest are no
longer displayed.
Map view for splitscreen
The map view can be selected for the split
screen independently from the main screen:
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Infor‐
mation on traffic obstructions and hazards
is updated continuously.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display realtime traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional
terms and conditions apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
End-User is in material breach of the terms
and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic
Network") holds the rights to the traffic in‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network
through which it is delivered. You may not
modify, copy, scan or use any other
method to reproduce, duplicate, republish,
transmit or distribute in any way any por‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
159
Navigation
Destination guidance
tion of traffic incident data. You agree to in‐
demnify, defend and hold harmless BMW
of North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and
Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their
affiliates) against any and all claims, dam‐
ages, costs or other expenses that arise di‐
rectly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthor‐
ized use of the traffic incident data or the
RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of
this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or
unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee "as is," and "where is". Total Traf‐
fic Network, including, but not limited to,
any and all third party providers of any of
the licensed material, expressly disclaims,
to the fullest extent permitted by law, all
warranties or representations with respect
to the licensed material (including, without
limitation, that the licensed material will be
error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex‐
press, implied or statutory, including, with‐
out limitation, the implied warranties of
merchantability, non-infringement fitness
for a particular purpose, or those arising
from a course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc.
or BMW NA will be liable to you for any in‐
direct, special, consequential, exemplary,
or incidental damages (including, without
limitation, lost revenues, anticipated reve‐
nues, or profits relating to the same) arising
from any claim relating directly or indirectly
to use of the traffic data, and even if Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are
aware of the possibility of such damages.
These limitations apply to all claims, in‐
cluding, without limitation, claims in con‐
160
tract and tort (such as negligence, product
liability and strict liability). Some states do
not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci‐
dental or consequential damages, so those
particular limitations may not apply to you.
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the
map by symbols.
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding
area are stored in a list.
The symbol in the function bar of the
map view turns red if there are traffic bulle‐
tins that affect the calculated route.
Switching the reception on/off
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Opening the list of traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Traffic Info"
First, traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
cle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of the
traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Destination guidance
garded in this setting. Symbols and Points of
Interest are not displayed.
Navigation
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired category.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are dis‐
played in the map using triangles or gray bars
along the calculated route.
▷ Red: traffic congestion
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic
▷ Green: clear roads
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
displayed on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the
route are always shown.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa‐
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot
be hidden.
Destination guidance with traffic
bulletins
General information
The displayed information depends on the par‐
ticular traffic information service.
Detour suggestions from the navigation sys‐
tem can be manually accepted when using
semi-dynamic destination guidance. When us‐
ing dynamic destination guidance, they are au‐
tomatically accepted for route guidance.
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road
construction
Filtering traffic bulletins
Semi-dynamic destination guidance
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on
the map.
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
1. "Navigation"
The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
obstructions.
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
The upper part of the message shows:
▷ Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos‐
sibly with the distance to the beginning of
the obstruction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
161
Navigation
Destination guidance
▷ Total length of the traffic obstructions on
the route.
Activating dynamic destination guidance
▷ Time by which the trip is extended due to
the traffic obstructions.
2. Open "Options".
The lower part of the message shows:
1. "Navigation"
3. "Dynamic guidance"
▷ Detour recommendation with the distance
to the beginning of the detour.
▷ Difference between the length of the new
route compared to the original route.
▷ Time gained if the detour is taken com‐
pared to the original route with the traffic
obstructions.
Both the original route, shown in white, and the
detour are displayed on the split screen.
Accepting the detour
"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic
messages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5.
"Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the
event of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed
on the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
What to do if...
Navigation
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot
be displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information
is not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown
can be determined. Input any street in the
selected city and start destination guid‐
ance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black
and white display. This enables a better
view of the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded,
or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new route suggestion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Entertainment
This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
and tracks from the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Entertainment
Tone
Tone
Vehicle equipment
3. Select the desired tone settings.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Equalizer
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.
3. "Equalizer"
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.
4. Select the desired setting.
2. "Tone"
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and
fader
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Tone
Multi-channel playback,
surround
Choose between stereo and multi-channel
playback, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
Entertainment
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
When surround is activated, multi-channel
playback is simulated when a stereo audio
track is played.
All tone settings can be reset to the default
setting.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Volume
3. "Reset"
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol‐
ume control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal com‐
pared to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
167
Entertainment
Radio
Radio
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
Controls
All saved stations are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
1
Volume, on/off
2
Change wave band
Changing the station
3
Change entertainment sources
Turn the controller and press it
4
Change station/track
or
5
Programmable memory buttons
Press the button
or
Sound output
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer
to page 14.
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press
ON/OFF button on the radio.
Storing a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Radio
3. Highlight the desired station.
Entertainment
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait for the desired name to
be displayed.
The selected station name is added to the list
of current stations and stored stations.
RDS
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
RDS broadcasts additional information, such
as the station name, in the FM wave band.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
The stations can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 24.
2. "FM"
Selecting a station manually
4. "RDS"
3. Open "Options".
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the control‐
ler.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi‐
tal signals.
License conditions
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Renaming a station
An FM station with changing station names
can be renamed.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.
and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,
HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐
marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
169
Entertainment
Radio
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
2. Press the controller.
1. "Radio"
When reception is poor, the substation is
muted.
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the substation.
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it
may take several seconds for the station to be
played back in digital quality.
Note on HD stations whose station name ends
in ...HD or with ...HD1:
In areas in which the station is not continu‐
ously received in digital mode, the playback
switches between analog and digital reception.
In this case, switch off digital radio reception.
Note on HD multicast stations whose station
name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:
In areas in which the station is not continu‐
ously received in digital mode, the audible sig‐
nal may be interrupted for several seconds.
This is reception related.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional informa‐
tion on the current track, such as the name of
the artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station
also broadcasts additional substations. The
station name of the main station ends in HD1.
Station names of the substations end in HD2,
HD3, etc.
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol
Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites cate‐
gory/open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols
can also be stored on the programmable mem‐
ory buttons, refer to page 24.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed
view of the sky. The channel name is displayed
in the status line.
1. Select the desired station.
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Radio
Enabling channels
Entertainment
4. "Manage subscription"
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Category"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the
channel enabled.
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via the iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
Via the button on the radio
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
171
Entertainment
Radio
Via direct channel entry
Selecting a category
1. "Radio"
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Set channel"
3.
"Category"
4. Turn the controller until the desired chan‐
nel is reached and press the controller.
4. Select the desired category.
Storing a channel
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal
must be available.
Timeshift
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
The stored audio track can be played with a
delay following the live broadcast. When the
buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten.
The buffer is cleared when a new channel is
selected.
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Replay - Time shift"
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 24.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first sym‐
bol on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol
Meaning
Channel name
172
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
▷ For live transmissions "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Artist
Go to the live broadcast
Track
Playback/pause
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Radio
Entertainment
4. Select the desired channel.
Symbol Function
5. Press the controller again.
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Storing the league or team
Reverse
Leagues or teams can be added to the favor‐
ites from a selection list.
Automatic timeshift deactivated/
activated
1. "Radio"
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1. "Radio"
5. Select the league.
2. "Satellite radio"
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
3.
"Replay - Time shift"
4.
"Automatic time shift"
To deactivate:
"Automatic time shift"
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
onds "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favor‐
ites list. Available favorites are artist, track,
game, league, and team.
Select the symbol while the message is
shown.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are
currently being broadcast. The channel infor‐
mation must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
The displayed favorite is played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
173
Entertainment
Radio
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites cur‐
rently being broadcast can be selected from a
list.
Managing the favorites
Information for the selected region is broad‐
cast as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
shortly.
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
1. "Satellite radio"
"Manage favorites"
2.
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2.
"Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update
of the channel names and positions. The up‐
date takes place automatically and may take
several minutes.
Notes
▷ Reception may not be available in some
situations, such as under certain environ‐
mental or topographic conditions. The sat‐
ellite radio has no influence on this.
▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels
or underground garages; next to tall build‐
ings; or near trees, mountains or other
powerful sources of radio interference.
Stored stations
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
General information
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Jump to:"
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Radio
Entertainment
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 24.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
175
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
CD/DVD
Playback
Loading the CD/DVD player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Controls
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is contained in the CD/DVD player.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
1
Volume, on/off
2
Eject CD/DVD
3
CD/DVD drive
4
Change the entertainment source
5
Change station/track
6
Programmable memory buttons
Symbol
Sound output
Meaning
CD/DVD player
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press
ON/OFF button on the radio.
176
Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL,
DVD audio (video part only), DVD video.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.
Entertainment
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
M4A.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until
the desired track is played back.
Selecting the track using the iDrive
Displaying information on the track
Audio CDs
If information about a track has been stored, it
is displayed automatically:
Select the desired track to begin playback.
▷ Artist.
▷ Album track.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly.
▷ File name of track.
1. Select the directory if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
Random playback
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
177
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
4. Open "Options".
Playback
5. "Random"
The video image is displayed on the Control
Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h;
in some countries, it is only displayed while the
parking brake is set or the automatic transmis‐
sion is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all
tracks within the selected directory are played
in random order.
4.
"DVD menu"
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
Video playback
Video menu
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the informa‐
tion on the DVD.
To open the video menu: turn the controller
during playback.
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol
Code Region
Function
1
USA, Canada
Open DVD menu
2
Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
Starting playback
3
Southeast Asia
Stop
4
Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
Next chapter
5
Northwest Asia, North Africa
6
China
0
All regions
178
Pause
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
Entertainment
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
Selecting the subtitles
DVD menu
1. Turn the controller during playback.
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. Open "Options".
2.
"DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD.
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the control‐
ler and press it.
DVD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
Selecting the language
1. Turn the controller during playback.
The languages that are available depend on
the DVD.
2. Open "Options".
1. Turn the controller during playback.
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
3. "Display settings"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the zoom
Display the video image on the entire screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
179
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
Notes
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
CD/DVD player
Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage can result.◀
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs
Selecting a track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle
The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrep‐
arable damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single
CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter
may jam and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
1. Turn the controller during playback.
General malfunctions
2. Open "Options".
▷ CD/DVD players have been optimized for
performance in vehicles. In some instances
they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/
DVDs than stationary devices would be.
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens,
and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
self-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/
DVD.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side
with a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played
or can only be played to a limited extent.
Entertainment
Music collection
Storing music
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the
CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the
vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A,
and AAC formats are stored. Individual
tracks and directories can be deleted later,
Deleting a track and directory, refer to
page 185.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision may only be used for private purposes. Copy‐
ing of this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other
patents granted and registered in the USA and
worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered
trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the
DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS,
Inc. All rights reserved.
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the
hard disc.◀
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry stand‐
ard in music recognition technology and re‐
lated content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000, Gracenote up to now.
Gracenote-Software Copyright 2000,
Gracenote up to now. This product and service
may practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,
#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and
other patents issued or pending. Some serv‐
ices supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
181
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
Storing from a CD/DVD
3. "Storing..."
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD
player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4.
Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player
as this will interrupt the storage process. You
can switch to the other audio sources without
interrupting the storage process. Tracks from
the current CD/DVD that have already been
stored can be called up.
Interrupting storage
3.
Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor‐
mation is available in the vehicle database or
on the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Storing from a USB device
2. "CD/DVD"
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 play‐
ers with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music
from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
via the USB audio interface in the center
armrest.
Entertainment
3. "Music search"
▷ File systems: standard file systems for
USB devices are supported. The FAT 32
format is recommended.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 125.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Select the desired category.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
5. Select the desired entry.
▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 25,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
Playing music
6. Select other categories if you wish.
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 184.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a cer‐
tain artist, call up that artist only. All of the
tracks by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
183
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
Music search by voice
Albums
Instructions for voice activation system, refer
to page 27.
All stored albums, listed in order of their stor‐
age dates.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Music search‹
Symbol
Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.
Current playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
The list of tracks that was generated last by
the music search, or the album that was se‐
lected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Top 50
2. "Music collection"
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
Entertainment
3. Open "Options".
Deleting an album
4. "Random"
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
Managing music
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
Albums
A directory cannot be deleted while a track
from that directory is being played.
Renaming an album
1. "CD/Multimedia"
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired.
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
Free memory capacity
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
5. "Rename album"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
6. Select the letters individually.
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing
up the music collection may take several
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
185
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the
backup during a long trip.
Deleting the music collection
1. Starting the engine.
2. "Music collection"
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 125.
3. Open "Options".
3. "CD/Multimedia"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Delete music collection"
External devices
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
At a glance
Symbol
Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
7. "Backup music on USB"
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
Connecting
When storing from the USB device, the exist‐
ing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
The AUX-IN port is in the center console.
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
Connect the headphone connector or line-out
connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "External devices"
4.
"AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs
markedly from the volume of the other audio
sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary, "External devices"
3.
"AUX front"
Entertainment
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones
that are supported by the USB audio inter‐
face.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
page 207, when equipped with the music
interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Playback is only possible if no audio device
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Due to the large number of different audio de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐
sured that every audio device/mobile phone is
operable on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio
devices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
4. "Volume"
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are
supported. The FAT 32 format is recom‐
mended.
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface/music interface
for smartphones
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
187
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
Connecting
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
or
symbol.
The USB audio interface is in the center con‐
sole.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in‐
terface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐
tect the USB audio interface and the USB de‐
vice against physical damage.
The playback starts with the first track.
The CD cover belonging to the track may ap‐
pear on the Control Display after several sec‐
onds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track.
After connecting for the first time
▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or
type of music, as well as playback lists are
transmitted into the vehicle. This may take
some time, depending on the USB device and
the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called
up via the file directory.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more
than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on
existing tracks may be deleted.
188
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
4.
or
symbol.
"Search"
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre"
or "Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered,
the results are filtered using this letter
as the first letter. If multiple letters are
entered, all results that contain that se‐
quence are displayed.
Random playback
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
3. Open "Options".
Entertainment
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Notes
6. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar‐
tist are to be displayed, call up that artist
only. All of the tracks by that artist are then
displayed.
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
4.
or
symbol.
"Playlists"
List of tracks currently being played.
2. "External devices"
4.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
1. "CD/Multimedia"
or
▷ The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
by the device. Therefore, do not addition‐
ally connect the device to a socket in the
vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐
promised.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
Current playback
3. Select the
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
7. "Start play"
3. Select the
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
At a glance
symbol.
"Current playback"
▷ Music files on external devices such as au‐
dio devices or mobile phones can be
played back via Bluetooth.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
189
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 200.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is de‐
pendent on the device. If necessary, adjust
the volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Details can be found
at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer
to page 199.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on
the device, such as for a connection with‐
out confirmation or visibility; refer to the
device operating instructions.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, re‐
fer to the device operating instructions: for
instance, search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle
on the device display.
You are prompted by the iDrive or device
to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own
vehicle's occupants and to other road users,
only pair the device while the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. "Add new phone"
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
8. Select the desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, for instance
"Audio".
9. "OK"
Entertainment
Connecting the device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
If pairing was successful, the device is dis‐
played as connected.
White symbol
audio source.
: the device is active as an
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 192.
White symbol
audio source.
: the device is active as an
Playback
Connecting a specific device
General information
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
▷ The display of music track information de‐
pends on the device.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive.
Requirements
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
ces.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect the device.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "External devices"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
191
Entertainment
4.
CD/multimedia
5. Open "Options".
Select the symbol.
6. "Remove phone from list"
5. Select the desired track from the list, if
necessary.
What to do if...
Playback menu
Depending on the particular device, some of
the functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Information on suitable devices can be found
at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 198.
The device is not supported by the vehicle.
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous music track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Disconnecting the audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Highlight the desired device.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
▷ Perform a software update, refer to
page 193, if needed.
The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce‐
dure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the device or vehicle? Delete
connections with other devices if neces‐
sary.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
Unpairing a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one device can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
nected device from the vehicle and pair
and connect only one device.
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the
device off and on again.
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
Entertainment
Music cannot be played back.
3. "Show current version"
▷ Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
Select desired version to display additional in‐
formation.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
Updating software via USB
Music files can only be played back softly.
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
Playback is disturbed when buttons are
pressed or by other messages on the device.
1. Store the file for the software-update in the
main director of a USB flash drive.
▷ Switch off the button tones and other sig‐
nal tones on the device.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au‐
dio interface in the center console. An up‐
date via the USB interface in the glove
compartment is not possible.
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati‐
cally.
3. "Settings"
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
4. "Software update"
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also
connected via the USB interface or the snap-in
adapter.
5. "Update software"
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 192. Start playback again.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
6. "Start update"
Software Update
7. "OK"
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version.
With a software update, the vehicle can sup‐
port new mobile phones or new external de‐
vice, for example.
▷ USB.
Software updates and related current infor‐
mation is available at www.bmw.com/
update.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
All listed software updates are installed.
Restoring the previous version
The software version prior to the last software
update can be restored.
The previous version can only be restored
when the vehicle is stationary.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.
2. "Software update"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
193
Entertainment
CD/multimedia
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of‐
fice functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
CD/multimedia
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Entertainment
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Communication
Telephone
Telephone
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
serve this precaution, you can endanger the
vehicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside
antenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices such
as audio players can be connected to the vehi‐
cle via Bluetooth.
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth® SIG, Inc.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle
and can then be operated via iDrive, the but‐
tons on the steering wheel, and via voice acti‐
vation.
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which
mobile phones are supported by the mobile
phone preparation package. The software ver‐
sion of the mobile phone may also be required.
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone
or as an audio source. The telephone functions
are described in the following. Operating the
audio functions, refer to page 189.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by
the mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
198
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐
nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐
pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Telephone
Communication
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
A software update, refer to page 193, can be
performed if necessary.
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere.
Notes
1. "Telephone"
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional te‐
lephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 189.
Additional functions
Activating/deactivating the additional
functions
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
able mobile phones, refer to page 198, that
support this function.
1. "Telephone"
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to
page 198.
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
5. Select the desired additional function.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be
made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐
nection without confirmation or visibility,
refer to the mobile phone operating in‐
structions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Office"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
6. "OK"
An additional function cannot be assigned to a
telephone while it is deactivated.
Additional telephone
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
telephone.
The additional telephone can be used to ac‐
cept incoming calls, refer to page 202. While a
call is active on the additional telephone, re‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
199
Communication
Telephone
ceived calls are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Audio source
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols
when paired.
A mobile phone can be used as an audio
source.
Pairing and connecting a mobile
phone
Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own
vehicle's occupants and to other road users,
only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or
connect the Bluetooth device or a new de‐
vice.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle
on the mobile phone display.
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐
key. Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Compare the control number on the vehi‐
cle display with the control number on the
mobile phone display. Confirm the control
number on the mobile phone and in the ve‐
hicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
200
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol
Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be
connected with the vehicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 201.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected
in the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition
is switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone
are transmitted to the vehicle after detec‐
tion, depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in
some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or
a secure connection; refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
nected.
The functions assigned to the mobile phone
before unpairing are assigned to the mobile
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Telephone
phone when it is reconnected. These functions
are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al‐
ready connected.
Communication
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
Configuring the mobile phone
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
ured.
4. Open "Options".
What to do if...
5. "Configure phone"
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 198.
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a function has already been assigned to an‐
other connected mobile phone, the function is
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo‐
bile phone is unpaired when the function is as‐
signed to a new mobile phone.
Swapping the telephone and
additional telephone
The function of the telephone and additional
telephone can be swapped automatically.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing the mobile phone
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in
the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce‐
dure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle? De‐
lete connections with other devices if nec‐
essary.
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
nected mobile phone from the vehicle and
pair and connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
201
Communication
Telephone
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or
low? Do not expose the mobile phone to
extreme environmental conditions.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the func‐
tion.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact Customer Relations or the service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone
book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐
plete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e. g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume
of the microphone on the telephone and the
volume of the called party. Depending on the
mobile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed. The settings can only be created during
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
telephone. The settings are deleted when the
telephone is unpaired.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or additional telephone? The mo‐
bile phone must be connected as a tele‐
phone.
1. "Settings"
The phone connection quality is poor.
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone"
or "Loudspeak."
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
202
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the
phone book and is transmitted by the network,
the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐
wise, only the phone number is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Telephone
If more than one phone number is assigned to
a contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
2.
Communication
"End call"
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to one of the telephones is
automatically rejected if there is an active call
on the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
"Accept"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4.
Select the symbol.
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The phone number can also be entered by
voice.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
1. "Telephone"
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These func‐
tions must be supported by the mobile phone
and service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
203
Communication
Telephone
If a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
Establish an additional call during an active
call.
1. "Telephone"
1. "Telephone"
3.
2. "Active calls"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
3.
"Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
2. "Active calls"
"Microphone mute"
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling de‐
vices, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐
swering machine. The DTMF code is needed
for this purpose.
1. "Telephone"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it
from a list.
"Return"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3.
"Keypad dialing"
The call on hold is resumed.
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Switching between two calls, hold call
Phone book
The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
"Swap calls"
The call on hold is resumed.
Establishing a conference call
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected
to make a call.
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1. "Telephone"
1. Establish two calls.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
2.
"Conference call"
204
2. "Phone book"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Telephone
Communication
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers
are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis‐
played. The sorting order of the phone num‐
bers depends on the particular mobile phone.
Calling a contact
Dialing a number via the instrument
cluster
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone
number.
This is possible if a call is not currently active.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
1.
Call not possible; mobile phone
without reception or network, or
Service Request is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number:
select the required contact. The connection is
being established.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Dialing the number via the iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
3. Select the desired entry and the phone
number if necessary.
1. Highlight the contact.
The connection is established.
2. Open "Options".
Deleting a single entry or all entries
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
The deletion of entries depends on your par‐
ticular mobile phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
205
Communication
Telephone
Saving an entry in the contacts
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Hands-free system
Displaying calls
General information
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
played.
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
From the mobile phone to the handsfree system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system
automatically switches to the hands-free sys‐
tem.
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your par‐
ticular mobile phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
206
If the system does not switch over automati‐
cally, follow the instructions on the mobile
phone display; refer also to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone
display; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐
ing instructions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Telephone
Snap-in adapter
Communication
3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but‐
ton 1.
General information
More information on compatible snap-in
adapters that support the functions of the mo‐
bile phone is available at the service center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting/removing the snap-in
adapter
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mo‐
bile phone up toward the electrical con‐
tacts and press it down until it engages.
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
The battery is charged beginning with the
radio ready state of the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
207
Communication
Telephone
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile
phone.
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Office
Communication
Office
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 77, are correctly set on the Control
Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐
stance to correctly display appointments.
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 199.
Updating
Data are updated every time the mobile phone
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up‐
dated separately.
At a glance
1. "Office"
General information
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages, and e-mails from the mobile phone
can be displayed on the Control Display if the
mobile phone provides compatible support of
these functions and the necessary Bluetooth
standards.
Information about which mobile phones sup‐
port Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited num‐
ber of compatible mobile phones is available
for Office.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.
The mobile phone has read-access only.
Do not use Office while driving
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Mobile phone data are transmitted again to
the vehicle.
Office information
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments
are displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
209
Communication
Office
Contacts
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select the desired contact.
Note
2. Select the phone number.
Equipment version with the mobile phone
preparation package.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone num‐
bers can be dialed.
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
Displaying contacts
General information
1. "Office"
3. Change the entries.
2. "Contacts"
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en‐
try is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1. Select the desired contact.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 25.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Symbol
Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the ve‐
hicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
Mobile phone.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Office
Communication
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight
the address.
Contact types
2. Open "Options".
Various contact types can be assigned to
phone numbers and addresses.
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If necessary, "Accept address"
Symbol
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy
of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
New contact
Other phone number.
General information
Home address.
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address
1. "Office"
A home address can be stored. It appears at
the top of the contact list.
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
1. "Office"
4. "New contact"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Home"
4. Create a contact.
5. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
5. The entry fields are still filled with the pre‐
vious entries: "Delete input fields"
1. "Office"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
3. Open "Options".
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the ve‐
hicle can be entered. This ensures that
destination guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
2. "Contacts"
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored
on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the
names may differ from the selected sorting or‐
der.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
211
Communication
Office
Show contact pictures
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
the vehicle when the mobile phone is con‐
nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit‐
ted pictures depends on the mobile phone.
The mobile phone must support this function.
1. "Office"
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
2. "Contacts"
My Info
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
Display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
Message from the Concierge serv‐
ice.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Filtering the message list
The message list can be filtered if more than
one type of message exists.
1. "Filter:"
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
6. If necessary. "Yes"
2. Select the type of message.
Messages
▷ "All"
All messages are displayed.
General information
Whether or not text messages and e-mails
from the mobile phone are displayed depends
on whether transmission from the mobile
phone to the vehicle is supported. Text mes‐
sages and e-mails may not be supported by
the service provider, or the function may need
to be enabled separately. After the mobile
phone is first paired, transmission may take
several minutes. Messages are only displayed
in full length when the vehicle is stationary.
Messages from the additional telephone are
not transmitted.
212
▷ "E-mail"
Only e-mails from the mobile phone
are displayed.
▷ "Service message"
Only messages from the BMW Assist
Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
played.
▷ "Text message"
Only text messages from the mobile
phone are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Office
Communication
Deleting messages
My Info
Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted.
Selecting additional functions
Delete a message:
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Sym‐
bol
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"
"Call"
Delete all messages:
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
"Select phone number"
3. Open "Options".
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. The connec‐
tion is established.
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service
messages"
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message
1. Select the desired message.
2.
Function
Select the symbol.
Message from the Concierge service
Storing an address
1. Select the desired message.
Saving the sender in the contacts
2. Open "Options".
1. Highlight the desired message.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 216.
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected:
Sym‐
bol
Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Reading the text message out loud
"Call"
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 216.
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
213
Communication
Sym‐
bol
Office
3. Open "Options".
Function
4. "Fully download e-mails"
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. The connec‐
tion is established.
"Further information"
Display additional information.
Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile
phone is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading the e-mail out loud
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 216.
Calendar
Display the calendar
E-mail
Displaying e-mails
Appointments during the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
2. "Calendar"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are
transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa‐
tion is displayed in the e-mail.
The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Selecting the calendar day
1. Select the date.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the
contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 216.
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the email is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This
may result in charges.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
2. Select the desired day or date.
▷ "Next day"
▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Display the appointment
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
sary:
▷ Turn the controller.
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Office
▷
Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 216.
Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 216.
Communication
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 216.
Reading the task out loud
Read the task out loud, refer to page 216.
Notes
Displaying notes
Tasks
1. "Office"
Displaying the task list
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note
1. Select the desired note.
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list
1. Select the header in the task list.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷
2. Select the sorting criterion:
▷ "Priority (!)"
Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 216.
▷ "Subject"
▷ "Due date"
Displaying the task
Reading the note out loud
1. Select the desired task.
Read the note out loud, refer to page 216.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷
Select the symbol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
215
Communication
Office
Reminders
Reading out loud
Displaying reminders
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
task is due, the reminder is no longer dis‐
played.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
1. "Office"
The following options are available during
reading:
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task
are displayed.
2.
▷
▷
Displaying contact or selecting phone
number
"Use contact data"
1.
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
▷ Select the contact to display contact
details.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
Storing contact data
"Use contact data"
1.
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
"Back to beginning"
Start reading the message again from the
beginning.
▷
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected.
"Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading.
Using contact data
At a glance
Select the symbol.
Select the symbol.
Go back one paragraph.
▷
Select the symbol.
Skip a paragraph.
▷ To end reading, turn the controller to the
left.
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 198.
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
played.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor‐
rectly.
▷ The Office function is deactivated.
3. Open "Options".
▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
tional phone.
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or
are more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Office
Communication
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in
the vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mo‐
bile phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly
set on the Control Display and mobile
phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the
mobile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile
phone and vehicle may take several mi‐
nutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
217
Communication
Contacts
Contacts
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
3. The entry fields are still filled with the pre‐
vious entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Note
5. Enter the text, refer to page 25.
Equipment version without the mobile phone
preparation package.
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone num‐
bers can be dialed.
In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys‐
tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
that are contained in the vehicle navigation
data. This ensures that destination guid‐
ance is possible for all addresses.
6. If necessary, "Store"
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at
the top of the contact list.
1. "Home"
New contact
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Contacts
2. "My contacts"
Communication
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone is edited,
the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the ve‐
hicle, and only this copy is displayed. Under
certain circumstances, a contact entry with the
same name is created.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 25.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol
Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing a phone number
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the ve‐
hicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight
the address.
2. Open "Options".
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy
of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. Change the entries.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
219
Communication
Contacts
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored
on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the
names may differ from the selected sorting or‐
der.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
ConnectedDrive
Communication
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Concierge service
General information
The Concierge service offers information on
events, gas stations, and hotels, and provides
phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be
booked directly using the Concierge service.
The Concierge service is part of the optional
Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
TeleService
General information
TeleService supports communication with
your service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center.
In this way, the service center can plan its
work in advance. This shortens the dura‐
tion of the service appointment.
3. "Start service"
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
A voice connection is established with the
Concierge service. Phone numbers and ad‐
dresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Messages
Information on messages, refer to page 212.
Requirements
Different variants of TeleService may be imple‐
mented in the vehicle. The following condi‐
tions must always be met:
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ A current ConnectedDrive subscription or
a vehicle equipped with intelligent Emer‐
gency Request.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 82.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
221
Communication
ConnectedDrive
Starting Roadside Assistance without
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
lished.
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a
connection is established to Roadside As‐
sistance.
BMW Online
At a glance
A business search can be opened via BMW
Online.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trade‐
mark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and
other countries.
Starting Roadside Assistance with
TeleService
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
General information
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
▷ The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
work coverage.
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically.
222
3. If necessary, "OK"
The BMW Online home page is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
ConnectedDrive
Communication
Operating BMW Online
Vehicle equipped with TeleService
To start a search:
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
2. "Customer Relations"
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
3. "Start service"
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Service Request
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to
request the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
Loading a new page
3. "Start service"
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 82.
Automatic Service Request
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your serv‐
ice partner prior to the service deadline. If pos‐
sible, the service partner will contact you and a
service appointment can be arranged.
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec‐
tion is established to Customer Relations.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
223
Communication
ConnectedDrive
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
3. "Available services"
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Updating BMW Assist
Manual update of TeleService.
3. Open "Options".
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
4. "Last Service Request"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Update BMW Assist"
TeleService Report
Transmits technical data when needed from
your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals; these
are evaluated for the continued development
of BMW products.
TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that
meet certain technical conditions and that
have a current ConnectedDrive subscription; it
is free of charge.
Neither personal nor position data are trans‐
mitted.
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Teleservice Info"
Data transfer
During the updating of BMW services, display
the status of the data transfer.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable mo‐
bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle.
These software applications are displayed on
the Control Display.
They are operated via iDrive.
Services status
Requirements
Displaying available services
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
ports the software applications of Apps.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
▷ Software applications are installed on the
mobile phone and ready to use.
2. "Service Status"
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
ConnectedDrive
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a
part of Apps.
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐
tions.
Information about suitable mobile phones,
available software applications and their instal‐
lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec‐
tivity or at the service center.
Create the entries.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
pants and other road users may be put in dan‐
ger because of the distraction from driving.
Communication
▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐
ously use Apps and the Bluetooth handsfree system.
If necessary, restart the software applica‐
tion on the mobile phone after a phone
conversation.
Remote Services
With Remote Services, a connection can be
established between a mobile phone and the
vehicle. This connection can be used, for ex‐
ample, to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle, additional functions
may be available.
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
To be able to use the functions, the My BMW
Remote app must be downloaded. Operation
takes place via the app.
Operating Apps
Alternatively, the functions can also be used
via the ConnectedDrive Hotline.
1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in
adapter or via the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
The operating instructions for the My BMW
Remote app can be found on the Connected‐
Drive portal or at www.bmw.com.
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed
on the Control Display depend on the
range of installed software applications on
the mobile phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications from the mobile phone to the ve‐
hicle can last some time. Some software
applications depend on the speed of the
available Internet connection of the mobile
phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Mobility
Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range below
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Notes
Switch off the engine before refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu‐
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.◀
Observe when handling fuel
Closing
▷ Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations
when handling fuel.
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.◀
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Refueling
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
can be released manually:
Mobility
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.6 US gal/
63 liters.
1. Press the cover out of the cargo area side
panel at the rear and remove it.
2. Take the button with the fuel pump symbol
out of the holder toward the front and pull.
This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,
escaping fuel may harm the environment or
damage the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury and property damage.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
229
Mobility
Fuel
Fuel
Fuel recommendation
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel
pump as containing metals.
Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with‐
out metal additives
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other
components will be permanently damaged.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable
standard.
The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different recommended fuel
grades.
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not fill up with fuel below the speci‐
fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine
may not run properly.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
ers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as
this would damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Mobility
231
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐
sure.
Checking the pressure
Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across
all four tires.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle
has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
232
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications apply to cold tires or tires at ambient
temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle
has been parked for at least 2 hours.
The values displayed by tire inflation stations
may be up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi too low.
For the Flat Tire Monitor: after adjusting the
tire inflation pressure to a new value, reinitialize
the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 93.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor: after adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to a new value, reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 96.
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct infla‐
tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at
ambient temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
approved and tire brands recommended by
BMW; a list of these is available from your
service center.
For correct identification of the right tire infla‐
tion pressures, observe the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures for driving up
to 100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Wheels and tires
These tire inflation pressures can also be
found on the driver's side door pillar when the
driver's door is open.
Mobility
not exceed this speed or else there is a risk of
tire damage and accidents.◀
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
Adjust the tire inflation pressures
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed
The permissible maximum speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do
To drive at maximum speeds in excess of
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the
following pages in the column for traveling
speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or
160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents could occur.◀
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Tire inflation pressures X1 sDrive28i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI
with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.4/35
2.8/41
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
2.4/35
-
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
-
2.6/38
225/50 R 17 94 V
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
233
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
-
2.8/41
Compact wheel:
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI
with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
2.4/35
2.9/42
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
2.4/35
-
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
-
2.9/42
Compact wheel:
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Mobility
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI
with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 V
2.4/35
2.9/42
2.6/38
3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
2.8/41
-
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
-
3.1/45
Compact wheel:
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressures X1 xDrive28i/X1 xDrive35i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI
with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.4/35
2.8/41
225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
235
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
2.4/35
-
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
-
2.6/38
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
-
2.8/41
Compact wheel:
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI
with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
2.4/35
2.9/42
2.6/38
3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
-
2.9/42
Compact wheel:
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Mobility
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI
with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 V
2.6/38
3.0/44
2.8/41
3.2/46
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
2.8/41
-
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
-
3.0/44
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
3.0/44
-
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
-
3.2/46
Compact wheel:
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
4.2/60
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the
tire makes it easier to identify and choose the
right tires.
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tire size
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V
DOT code:
225: nominal width in mm
DOT xxxx xxx 2313
45: aspect ratio in %
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
R: radial tire code
xxx: tire size and tire design
17: rim diameter in inches
2313: tire age
91: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
Tire age
The tire manufacturing date is contained in the
tire identification mark: DOT ... 2313 means
that the tire was manufactured in the
week 23 of 2013.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires af‐
ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
237
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Temperature
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.◀
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
238
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
page 241.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Wheels and tires
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Mobility
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,
road damage and similar situations.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a lifethreatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
other road users.◀
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Tire damage
General information
Changing wheels and tires
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Mounting
Notes
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Information on mounting tires
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
obtained from the service center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
239
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
Recommended tire brands
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle if they are mounted.◀
Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect
a flat tire, refer to page 95. Your service center
will be glad to advise you.
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Wheels and tires
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐
cidents can occur.◀
Mobility
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a pressure loss.
Driving with a damaged tire:
▷ Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 93
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front
and rear axles.
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 95
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Rotating the tires is not permissible when us‐
ing different types of tires.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your service center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Run-flat tires
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor or reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor if snow chains are
mounted; otherwise, the instrument might is‐
sue an incorrect reading.
Label
When driving with snow chains, it can be bene‐
ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 100.
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
241
Mobility
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Important features in the engine compartment
1
Coolant expansion tank 246
4
Jump-starting, positive terminal
2
Vehicle identification number
5
3
Filler neck for washer fluid for the head‐
lamp and window washer system 67
Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Engine compartment
Hood
Mobility
Closing the hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Risk of damage
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto
the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
1. Pull the lever.
Drop the hood from a height of ap‐
prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to
engage.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Engine oil
General information
2. Lift the hood all the way.
3. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
Engine oil consumption depends on the driv‐
ing style and the conditions of use. A highly
sporty driving style, for example, results in
considerably higher engine oil consumption.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Depending on the engine, the vehicle uses
electronic oil measurement or dip stick meas‐
urement.
Checking the engine oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic engine
oil level check.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
243
Mobility
Engine compartment
Requirements
Symbol
▷ The engine must be running and warm af‐
ter the vehicle has been driven for at least
6.2 miles/10 km.
Function
Oil at minimum level:
Add a maximum quantity of
1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil,
refer to page 245, at the next
opportunity.
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.
Display in the instrument cluster
Oil level is too high.
1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the ap‐
propriate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the word "OIL".
Overfilling oil damages the en‐
gine. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
The oil level sensor is defec‐
tive.
Do not add engine oil.
It is possible to continue driv‐
ing. Note the newly calculated
remaining mileage until the
next oil service, refer to
page 80. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.
The oil level is checked and the reading
displayed.
Possible displays
Symbol
Display via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Function
Oil level OK.
Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes
if the car is at a standstill on a
level surface, or about 5 mi‐
nutes while the car is on the
move.
3.
"Engine oil level"
Possible messages
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap‐
prox. 3 minutes.
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Engine compartment
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 li‐
ter of engine oil at the next opportunity, re‐
fer also to Adding engine oil below.
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Mobility
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi‐
ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal‐
culated remaining mileage until the next oil
service, refer to page 80. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Notes
No oil additives
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.◀
Viscosity classes of engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE vis‐
cosity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or
5W-30, or malfunctions or engine damage may
occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Filler neck
Due to national regulations, some oil types are
not available in every country.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
of oil only after a corresponding message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Add oil promptly
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Further information on approved oil types can
be obtained from the service center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be used:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
245
Mobility
Engine compartment
Gasoline engine
API SM or a higher quality standard
pressure to escape; then continue turning
to open.
Oil change
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having the engine oil changed by a service
center.
3. The filling level indicator 1 in the filler neck
indicates the coolant level. The coolant
level is correct if it is between the arrows of
the respective reservoir label 2.
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐
ter for suitable additives.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the appropriate environ‐
mental protection regulations when dis‐
posing of coolant additives.
Checking the coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Maintenance
Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
BMW Maintenance System
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 80, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
On the Control Display, the remaining distan‐
ces and times for selected maintenance re‐
quirements and any legally required deadlines
can be displayed individually, refer to page 80.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Setting the correct date
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 78; otherwise, the effectiveness of
CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀
The maintenance system provides information
on required maintenance measures and thus
provides support in maintaining road safety
and the operational reliability of the vehicle.
Service scopes and intervals may vary with the
country version. Replacement work, spare
parts, fuels and lubricants and wear materials
are calculated separately. Additional informa‐
tion can be obtained from the service center.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
247
Mobility
Maintenance
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may
only be used by the service center, by work‐
shops that operate according to the specifica‐
tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro‐
priately trained personnel, and by other
authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may
lead to vehicle malfunctions.◀
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Display of the previously described
malfunctions on Canadian models.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tight‐
ened, the OBD system may conclude
that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then
tightened, the display should go out in a short
time.
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Replacing components
Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Front
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 66.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
Tool kit
The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor
panel and storage compartment in the cargo
area.
Wiper blade replacement
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
3. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Take the wiper blade out of the catch
mechanism toward the front.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order,
making sure it engages.
Risk of damage
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto
the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
249
Mobility
Replacing components
Rear
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is
carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch
mechanism toward the front.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Notes
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always switch off the lights af‐
fected to prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
250
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu‐
cent lenses serve as the light source for many
of the controls, displays and other equipment
in your vehicle.
These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlamps in cool or humid weather. When
you drive with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlamps do not need to be changed.
If the condensation in the headlamps does not
evaporate after trips with the lights switched
on, and the amount of moisture in the head‐
lamps increases, for example if water droplets
form, have them checked by your service cen‐
ter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Replacing components
Headlight setting
Mobility
clockwise all the way using a coin, for ex‐
ample.
Changing the bulbs and lights may influence
the headlight settings. Have the headlight set‐
ting checked by a service center and corrected
if necessary after changing bulbs or lights.
Removing the headlight cover
The high-beam bulbs can be replaced via the
engine compartment, and the low beam and
turn signal bulbs can be replaced via a folding
cover in the wheel arch.
Halogen headlights
At a glance
1
High-beam cover
2
Low beam cover
3
Turn signal bulb socket
To remove the covers:
1
High-beams/headlight flasher
▷ High-beams: fold out the bracket, arrow 4,
and take the cover out of the guide.
2
Parking lights
3
Low beams
▷ Low beams: unscrew the cover, arrow 5.
4
Turn signal
Attach the covers carefully
When attaching the covers, proceed
carefully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing
damage to the headlamp system.◀
Proceed in reverse order when attaching the
covers.
Access via the wheel arch
For low beams and turn signals only:
Low beams and high-beams
Wear protective goggles and gloves
Halogen bulbs are pressurized. There‐
fore, wear protective goggles and gloves. Oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb
is accidentally damaged during replacement.◀
The low beams and high-beams have separate
covers.
1. Turn the wheel inward.
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch.
To open the locks, turn them counter‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
251
Mobility
Replacing components
H7 bulb, 55 watt
3. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow.
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Low beam: open the folding cover in the
wheel arch, refer to page 251.
3. Remove the corresponding cover, refer to
page 251.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Slide the wire bracket sideways out of the
anchor, arrow 1, and fold down, arrow 2.
4. Pull off the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the bulb socket.
6. Reattach the cover.
Xenon headlights
Xenon headlights
At a glance
6. Remove the bulb.
7. Insert the new bulb.
8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.
9. Mount the connector.
10. Reattach the cover.
11. Low beam: attach the folding cover in the
wheel arch.
Parking and roadside parking lights
5-watt bulb, W5W
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the high-beam cover, refer to
page 251.
1
Parking lights / daytime running lights
2
Low beams/high-beams/headlight flasher
3
Turn signal
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is
carried out improperly.◀
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Replacing components
Adhere to the general instructions, refer to
page 250.
With Xenon headlights, the following lights are
designed with LED technology:
▷ Parking and roadside parking lights.
▷ Daytime running lights.
Mobility
Turn signals, front
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch,
refer to page 251.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Parking lights and roadside parking
lights, daytime running lights
H8 bulb, 35 watt
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the high-beam cover, refer to
page 251.
3. Turn the bulb by approx. 90˚, see arrow,
and pull it out.
3. Turn the turn signal bulb socket 1 to the
left and remove it.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
5. Insert the turn signal bulb socket 1 and
turn it all the way to the right.
6. Attach the folding cover in the wheel arch.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 250.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
6. Reattach the cover.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Tail lights
The tail lights consist of two parts. One part is
in the tailgate and the other is in the fender.
P21W bulbs, 21 watt
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
253
Mobility
Replacing components
On the right side, take the button with the
fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward
the front if necessary.
1
Backup light
2
Roadside parking light/tail light LED
3
Brake light
4
Turn signal
5
Inner brake light
4. Squeeze the lower clips, arrows 2, and take
out the bulb holder.
Contact your service center in the event of a
faulty roadside parking lamp/tail lamp.
5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
Lamps in the fender
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi‐
bly clicks into place.
All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.
7. Replace the cover.
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
Inside brake lights in the tailgate
2. Press the cover out of the cargo area side
panel at the rear and remove it.
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Take the warning triangle out of the
bracket, refer to page 258.
3. Release the screws of the tailgate panel,
arrows.
3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing
down the upper clip, arrow 1.
4. Unclip the tailgate panel by pulling it down‐
ward.
5. Push out the handle for opening manually
in the event of an electrical malfunction, re‐
fer to page 38, insert it through the open‐
ing, and take off the panel.
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Replacing components
6. Release the bulb holder with the clip, see
arrows, and remove it.
7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi‐
bly clicks into place.
9. Insert the handle for opening manually
through the tailgate panel opening and
press it in.
10. Reattach the tailgate panel.
License plate lamp, center brake lamp,
and roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Changing wheels
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, re‐
fer to page 241, as standard equipment.
They do not need to be replaced immediately
in the event of a puncture.
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat
tire.
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use runflat tires for your own safety.
Suitable tools for changing the wheels are
available from the service center as an acces‐
sory.
Mobility
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you
on questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to
the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory
as this could damage the battery.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
255
Mobility
Replacing components
General information
Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged
to achieve the full battery life.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in
the following cases:
▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to
drive short distances.
▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for
more than one month.
Starting aid terminals
Only charge using the starting aid terminals,
refer to page 259, in the engine compartment
while the engine is switched off.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again, refer to page 50.
▷ Time: update, refer to page 77.
Access to fuse box:
▷ Date: update, refer to page 78.
1. Open the glove compartment.
▷ Radio station: save again, refer to
page 168.
2. Release the damper from the bottom
holder by applying pressure toward the
front, arrow 1.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the navigation
system to be operational.
▷ Panoramic glass sunroof: it may only be
possible to tilt the roof. Have the system
initialized by the service center.
3. Unlock the glove compartment by pressing
on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold down.
A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the cur‐
rent distributor.
▷ Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to
page 117.
Information on the fuses can be found on the
back of the cover.
▷ xDrive: the system automatically initializes
as you drive. During this time, indicator
lamps light up. If the lamps do not disap‐
pear during the current trip, have the sys‐
tem checked.
Spare fuses are available from the service cen‐
ter.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Breakdown assistance
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Hazard warning flashers
The button for the hazard warning system is
located on the center console.
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
While driving and when using the turn
signal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional
turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not
be in the appropriate position and will be diffi‐
cult to detect.◀
Intelligent Emergency
Request
Requirements
▷ Radio readiness is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is operable.
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle is
activated.
▷ ConnectedDrive subscription is available.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in
the vehicle until the connection has been
established.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been
established.
Once the BMW Response Center has re‐
ceived your Emergency Request, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
257
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
if it can be established, are transmitted to
the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
ment on the right side in the cargo area.
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any items promptly.
Jump-starting
Warning triangle
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press
on the tab, arrow.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Breakdown assistance
Bodywork contact between vehicles
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there
is a danger of shorting.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
Mobility
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding starting aid terminal of the
vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐
sistance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal. Pull the cover up and off.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Connecting jumper cables
1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.◀
No additional passengers
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
259
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Automatic transmission, 8-gear:
transporting your vehicle
Automatic transmission, 6-gear
Selector lever in position N.
Adhere to the towing speed and distance
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀
Do not exceed a towing speed of
40 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km or damage to the transmis‐
sion can occur.◀
Being towed
Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle
damage or accidents may occur.◀
Tow truck
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing your vehicle
Observe before towing your vehicle
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to
control vehicle response.◀
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow truck
sDrive
Vehicles with automatic transmission, 6-gear.
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Breakdown assistance
Mobility
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Tow bar
xDrive
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.
Towing a vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a vehicle with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case
could be damaged.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be
possible to control vehicle response.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.
It is located in the tool kit under the cargo floor
cover and storage compartment in the cargo
area, refer to page 249.
It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo
floor cover in the cargo area, refer to page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
261
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Press on the lower part of the cover. The cover
is pushed out at the top edge and can be
pulled out.
Tow-starting
Note
Do not tow-start your vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Care
Mobility
Care
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as
leaves, from the area below the windshield
when the hood is open.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Washing in automatic car washes
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Car washes
Notes
Notes
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Note the following:
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause
damage or preliminary damage that may then
lead to long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the highpressure washer.◀
Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers
toward the decorative labels applied by the
manufacturer; otherwise, damage may result.
Cleaning sensors/cameras with highpressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for
Park Distance Control or the backup camera,
for instance, for extended periods of time and
only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 65, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ Move the rear window wiper to its resting
position, deactivate it, and protect it
against damage. Ask the car wash operator
about any necessary protective measures.
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
there is a risk that these may be damaged.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
are taken.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
263
Mobility
Care
Automatic transmission
Car care and cleaning products
1. Release the parking brake, refer to
page 63.
2. Drive into the car wash.
3. Depress the brake pedal if necessary.
4. Engage the selector lever or transmission
position N.
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
5. Switch the engine off.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock so that the vehicle can roll.
Vehicle paint
In 8-gear automatic transmissions, transmis‐
sion position P is engaged automatically:
▷ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes.
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
Headlights
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with high air pollution or natural contami‐
nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an
impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these in‐
fluences.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop‐
pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of
the paintwork.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Leather care
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Fully remove any residue from the windows to
prevent obstruction of view from streaking,
wiping noises, and wiper wear.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Vehicle care
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
264
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Care
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
ble interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the seat
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only
use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value
of 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaners or a
steam jet hotter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise,
damage may result. Adhere to the manufac‐
turer instructions.
Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may
destroy the protective coating of neighboring
components such as the brake disc.
Mobility
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Moisten the cloth lightly with water if neces‐
sary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
No chemical cleaning
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
265
Mobility
Care
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again when they are returned after being
removed, such as for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐
ger compartment for cleaning.
When returning the floor mats, secure them
again to prevent slipping.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an anti-static micro‐
fiber cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Care
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Mobility
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and
an index that will quickly take you to the
information you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Reference
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
Note
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
The technical data and specifications in the
Owner's Manual serve as guidelines. Detailed
values can be obtained from your registration
documents, from labels in your vehicle, or from
the service center.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
Dimensions
BMW X1
Width without mirrors
inches/mm
70.8 / 1,798
Width with mirrors
inches/mm
81.0/2,058
Height
inches/mm
60.8/1,545
Length
inches/mm
176.5/4,484
Wheelbase
inches/mm
108.7/2,760
Smallest turning circle dia.
ft/m
37.1/11.3
Smallest turning circle dia. with all-wheel
drive
ft/m
38.7/11.8
Weights
BMW X1
X1 sDrive28i
X1 xDrive28i
X1 xDrive35i
Approved gross vehicle
weight
lbs/kg
4,497/2,040
4,707/2,135
4,861/2,205
Load
lbs/kg
904/410
904/410
904/410
Approved front axle load
lbs/kg
2,116/960
2,326/1,055
2,425/1,100
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Technical data
BMW X1
Reference
X1 sDrive28i
X1 xDrive28i
X1 xDrive35i
Approved rear axle load
lbs/kg
2,546/1,155
2,590/1,175
2,646/1,200
Approved roof load ca‐
pacity
lbs/kg
165/75
165/75
165/75
Cargo area capacity
cu ft/liter
25.0-56.0/420‐
1,350
25.0-56.0/420‐
1,350
25.0-56.0/4201,350
Capacities
BMW X1
Fuel tank
Notes
US gal/liters
Approx. 16.6/63
Fuel specifications, refer to
page 230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
271
Reference
Short commands for voice activation system
Short commands for voice activation
system
Vehicle equipment
General information
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Instructions for voice activation system, refer
to page 27.
When using the features and systems descri‐
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
The following short commands apply to vehi‐
cles equipped with a voice activation system.
They have no function in vehicles in which only
the mobile phone is operated using the voice.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function
Command
Opens the main menu.
›Main menu‹
Open the options.
›Options‹
Open the settings.
›Settings‹
Settings on the Control Display.
›Control display‹
Open the time and date.
›Time and date‹
Open the language and units.
›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit.
›Speed‹
Open the light.
›Lighting‹
Open the door lock.
›Door locks‹
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Short commands for voice activation system
Reference
Vehicle information
Computer
Function
Command
Open the computer.
›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer.
›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function
Command
Open the vehicle information.
›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status.
›Vehicle status‹
Navigation
General information
Function
Command
Navigation menu.
›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry.
›Enter address‹
Enter the address.
›Enter address‹
Enter the town/city.
›City‹
Enter the country.
›State‹
Enter the postal code.
›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance.
›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance.
›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance.
›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address.
›Home address‹
Open the route criteria.
›Route preference‹
Open the route.
›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction.
›Switch on voice instructions‹
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
273
Reference
Short commands for voice activation system
Function
Command
Repeat the spoken instruction.
›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switch off the spoken instruction.
›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book.
›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations.
›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins.
›Traffic Info‹
Points of Interest.
›Points of interest‹
Map
Function
Command
Display the map.
›Map‹
Map facing north.
›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel.
›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map.
›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map.
›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet.
›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters.
›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale
100 meters
Scale...kilometers.
›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map
scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles.
›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale
5 miles
Split screen settings
Function
Command
Split screen.
›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen.
›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen.
›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north.
›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position.
›Split screen current position‹
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Short commands for voice activation system
Reference
Function
Command
Split screen, facing the direction of travel.
›Split screen map in direction of
travel‹
Split screen, perspective.
›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom.
›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet.
›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters.
›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g.,
split screen scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers.
›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g.,
split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles.
›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation.
›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer.
›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer.
›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically.
›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function
Command
Enter a new destination.
›Enter address‹
Trip list.
›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function
Command
Open a frequency.
›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,
93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio.
›Radio‹
Open the FM stations.
›F M‹
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
275
Reference
Short commands for voice activation system
Function
Command
Open the manual search.
›Manual‹
Select a frequency range.
›Select frequency‹
Open a station.
›Select station‹
AM
Function
Command
Open a frequency.
›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐
quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations.
›A M‹
Open the manual search.
›Manual‹
Satellite radio
Function
Command
Open the satellite radio.
›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio.
›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel.
›Select satellite radio‹, e.g., satellite
radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function
Command
Open the stored stations.
›Presets‹
Choose a stored station.
›Select preset‹
Select a stored station.
›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Short commands for voice activation system
Reference
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function
Command
Select a track.
›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
or
›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD.
›C D on‹
Select a CD.
›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track.
›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu.
›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD.
›C D‹
Select a DVD.
›D V D ...‹ e.g., DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split screen.
›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function
Command
Search for music, open a menu.
›Music search‹
Open the current playback.
›Current playback‹
Open the music collection.
›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection.
›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks.
›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function
Command
Open the external devices.
›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices.
›Bluetooth‹
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
277
Reference
Short commands for voice activation system
Tone
Function
Command
Open the tone settings.
›Tone‹
Telephone
Function
Command
Dial a phone number.
›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu.
›Telephone‹
Display the phone book.
›Phonebook‹
Redialing.
›Redial‹
Display received calls.
›Received calls‹
List of messages.
›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices.
›Bluetooth‹
Office
Function
Command
Open the Office menu.
›Office‹
Display Office Today.
›Current office‹
Display the contacts.
›Contacts‹
Display the messages.
›Messages‹
Display the calendar.
›Calendar‹
Display the tasks.
›Tasks‹
Display the reminders.
›Reminders‹
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Short commands for voice activation system
Reference
Contacts
Function
Command
Select a name.
›Choose name‹
My contacts.
›My contacts‹
Open the contacts.
›Contacts‹
New contact.
›New contact‹
ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist
Function
Command
Open BMW Assist.
›B M W Assist‹
Open ConnectedDrive.
›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Online.
›B M W Online‹
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
279
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 99
Accident, refer to Emergency
Request, initiating 257
Acoustic signal, refer to
Check Control 82
Activated charcoal filter with
automatic climate con‐
trol 113
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 98
Adaptive Light Control 86
Additional telephone 198
Additives, coolant 246
Additives, engine oil 245
After washing vehicle 264
Airbags 90
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 93
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated air mode 112
Air conditioning mode, auto‐
matic climate control 110
Air conditioning mode, venti‐
lation 113
Air distribution, auto‐
matic 111
Air distribution, manual 111
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 112
Air flow rate 112
Airing, refer to Ventila‐
tion 113
Air pressure, refer to Tire in‐
flation pressure 232
Air supply, automatic climate
control 110
Air supply, ventilation 113
280
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 113
Alarm system 41
Alarm system, avoiding unin‐
tentional alarms 42
Alarm system, ending an
alarm 41
Alarm system, interior motion
sensor 42
Alarm system, tilt alarm sen‐
sor 42
All around the headliner 19
ALL program 112
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 240
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 101
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 116
AM/FM station 168
Announcement, navigation,
see Spoken instruc‐
tions 157
Antifreeze, coolant 246
Antifreeze, washer fluid 67
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 99
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control
DSC 99
Anti-theft protection 34
Appointments 214
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 270
Approved engine oils 245
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to
Weights 270
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 126
Arrival time, refer to Com‐
puter 76
Ashtray 119
Assistance with driving off,
refer to Drive-off assis‐
tant 102
Assistance with starting en‐
gine, refer to Jump-start‐
ing 258
Audio device, external 126
Audio playback 177
Audio playback, Blue‐
tooth 189
Automatic, air distribu‐
tion 111
Automatic, air flow rate 111
Automatic car wash 263
Automatic climate con‐
trol 110
Automatic climate control,
automatic air distribu‐
tion 111
Automatic, cruise control 103
Automatic Curb Monitor 51
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 86
Automatic recirculated air
control 112
Automatic Start/Stop func‐
tion 61
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 67, 70
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic, interlock 67
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic, kickdown 68, 70
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic, overriding selec‐
tor lever lock 69
AUTO program with auto‐
matic climate control 111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
AUX-IN port 186
Average fuel consumption 75
Average fuel consumption,
setting the unit 77
Average speed 75
Average speed, refer to Com‐
puter 75
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 270
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 47
Backrests, refer to Seats 46
Backrest width adjust‐
ment 48
Back seats, adjusting the
backrest tilt 121
Backup camera 107
Backup camera, obstacle
marking 108
Backup camera, pathway
lines 108
Backup camera, turning
lines 108
Backup lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 254
Balance 166
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 258
Bass 166
Battery disposal 256
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐
tery 255
Battery, remote control 32
Battery replacement, remote
control for vehicle 41
Before entering the car
wash 263
Being towed 260
Belts, refer to Safety belts 48
Belt tensioners, refer to
Safety belts 48
Beverage holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 127
Black and white map dis‐
play 160
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 112
Bluetooth audio 189
Bluetooth connection, acti‐
vating/deactivating 199
BMW Apps 224
BMW Driver's Guide App 6
BMW EfficientDynamics, re‐
fer to Saving fuel 139
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 247
BMW Online 222
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 127
Brake assistant 99
Brake discs, breaking in 132
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 80
Brake force display 98
Brake force distribution, elec‐
tronic 99
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 98
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 254
Brake lights, adaptive 98
Brake pads, breaking in 132
Brake, refer to Parking
brake 63
Brakes, BMW maintenance
system 247
Brakes, service require‐
ments 80
Brake system, BMW mainte‐
nance system 247
Braking, notes 133
Braking, parking brake 63
Breakdown assistance, refer
to Roadside Assistance 221
Breakdown, transporting the
vehicle 260
Breaking in 132
Reference
Brightness on the Control
Display 80
Bulb replacement, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 250
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/Stop but‐
ton 59
C
Calendar 214
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, care 266
Camera, refer to Backup cam‐
era 107
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 127
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 255
Car care products 264
Care 263
Care, displays 266
Care, vehicle 264
Cargo 136
Cargo area 120
Cargo area, capacities 270
Cargo area, Comfort Ac‐
cess 40
Cargo area, cover 120
Cargo area, enlarging 121
Cargo area, folding up the
cargo floor panel 123
Cargo area lid, refer to Tail‐
gate 38
Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐
rior lights 89
Cargo area, multi-function
hook 124
Cargo area, opening from the
inside 38
Cargo area, opening from the
outside 38
Cargo area, partition net 121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
281
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Cargo floor panel, folding
up 123
Cargo floor panel, raising 123
Cargo net, refer to Partition
net 121
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 137
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 32
Carpet, care 265
Car phone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 126
Car phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 198
Car vacuum cleaner, connect‐
ing, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 119
Car wash 263
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 133
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 247
CD/DVD 176
CD notes 180
CDs, storing 181
Cell phone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 126
Center armrest, front 126
Center armrest, rear 126
Center brake lamp, bulb re‐
placement 255
Center console, refer to
Around the center con‐
sole 18
Central locking, Comfort Ac‐
cess 39
Central locking from the in‐
side 37
Central locking from the out‐
side 33
Central locking, setting the
unlocking characteristics 34
Central screen, refer to Con‐
trol Display 20
282
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing wheels/tires 239
Check Control 82
Children, transporting 54
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 55
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tems 54
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 54
Child safety locks 57
Child seat, mounting 54
Child seats, refer to Trans‐
porting children safely 54
Chrome parts, care 265
Cigarette lighter, connecting
electrical devices 119
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 119
Cigarette lighter socket 119
Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
circulated air mode 112
Cleaning, displays 266
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 263
Clock 73
Clock, 12h/24h format 78
Clock, setting the time and
date 78
Clock, setting the time
zone 78
Closing from the inside 37
Closing from the outside 34
Clothes hooks 127
Cockpit 14
Cold start, refer to Starting
the engine 60
Combination instrument, refer
to Instrument cluster 16
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signal/high beams/
headlamp flasher 64
Combination switch, refer to
Washer/wiper system 64
Comfort Access 39
Comfort Access, battery re‐
placement 41
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 18
Compact wheel, inflation
pressure 232
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Compartment in floor 123
Compartments, refer to Stor‐
age compartments 125
Compass, digital 117
Computer 75
Computer, displaying infor‐
mation 75
Computer, displays on the
Control Display 76
Concierge service 221
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 134
Condition Based Service
CBS 247
Confirmation signals 35
Connecting, mobile phone,
refer to Pairing the mobile
phone 199
Consumption, refer to Aver‐
age fuel consumption 75
Contacts 210
Control Display 20
Control Display, care 266
Control Display, settings 79
Controller 21
Controls and displays 14
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 99
Convenient operation, glass
sunroof 34
Convenient operation, win‐
dow 34
Coolant 246
Coolant, checking the
level 246
Coolant temperature 74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Cooling function, switching
on and off 112
Cooling, maximum 111
Cooling system, refer to Cool‐
ant 246
Corrosion on brake discs 134
Courtesy lights, refer to Inte‐
rior lights 89
Cradle for telephone or mo‐
bile phone, refer to Snap-in
adapter 207
Cruise control 103
Cruise control, malfunc‐
tion 105
Cupholder 127
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 270
Current fuel consumption 74
Current location, storing 148
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 86
D
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 89
Dashboard, refer to Cock‐
pit 14
Data, technical 270
Date, date format 79
Date, setting 78
Daytime running lights 86
Daytime running lights, bulb
replacement 253
Defroster, rear window 113
Destination entry via the ad‐
dress book 148
Destination guidance 155
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 153
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 146
Digital clock 73
Digital compass 117
Digital radio 169
Dimming mirrors 52
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 89
Displays and controls 14
Displays, care 266
Displays, cleaning 266
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 16
Disposal, coolant 246
Disposal, vehicle battery 256
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 105
Divided rear seat backrest, re‐
fer to Cargo area, enlarg‐
ing 121
Divided screen view, split
screen 24
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 32
Door lock 36
Doors, manual operation 37
Doors, unlocking and locking,
confirmation signals 35
Doors, unlocking and locking
from the inside 37
Doors, unlocking and locking
from the outside 34
DOT Quality Grades 238
Downhill control 101
Draft-free ventilation 113
Drive-off assistant 102
Driving away on inclines, refer
to Drive-off assistant 102
Driving notes, breaking
in 132
Driving notes, general 132
Driving on poor roads 134
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 99
Driving through water 133
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 132
Reference
Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
tion 112
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 99
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 100
DTMF suffix dialing 204
DVD/CD 176
DVDs, storing 181
DVD, video 178
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 162
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 99
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 100
E
ECO PRO 140
ECO PRO display 140
ECO PRO driving mode 140
ECO PRO mode 140
EfficientDynamics, refer to
Saving fuel 139
Electrical malfunction, door
lock 37
Electrical malfunction, driver's
door 37
Electrical malfunction, fuel
filler flap 229
Electrical malfunction, tail‐
gate 38
Electric seat adjustment 47
Electronic brake-force distri‐
bution 99
Electronic engine oil level
check 243
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control DSC 99
Emergency operation, auto‐
matic transmission, refer to
Overriding selector lever
lock 69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
283
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Emergency operation, door
lock, refer to Manual opera‐
tion 37
Emergency operation, fuel
filler flap, unlocking man‐
ually 229
Emergency Request 257
Energy-conscious driving, re‐
fer to Current fuel consump‐
tion 74
Energy, saving, Automatic
Start/Stop function 61
Energy, saving, refer to Sav‐
ing fuel 139
Engine, breaking in 132
Engine compartment 242
Engine coolant, refer to Cool‐
ant 246
Engine oil, adding 245
Engine oil, additives, refer to
Approved engine oils 245
Engine oil, alternative oil
types 245
Engine oil, BMW maintenance
system 247
Engine oil change intervals,
refer to Service require‐
ments 80
Engine oil, checking the
level 243
Engine oil, filling ca‐
pacity 271
Engine oil temperature 74
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 245
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 245
Engine, overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Engine start, assistance 258
Engine, starting 60
Engine, starting, Comfort Ac‐
cess 39
Engine, starting, Start/Stop
button 59
284
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
button 59
Engine, switching off 61
Environmentally friendly driv‐
ing, refer to Current fuel
consumption 74
Equalizer 166
Equipment, interior 115
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control DSC 99
Exchanging wheels/tires 239
Exhaust system 133
Exterior mirrors 51
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 51
Exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming 52
Exterior mirrors, automatic
heating 52
Exterior mirrors, folding in and
out 52
External audio device 126
External devices 186
External temperature dis‐
play 73
External temperature display,
changing the unit of meas‐
ure 77
External temperature display,
on computer 77
External temperature warn‐
ing 73
Eyes for securing cargo 137
F
Fader 166
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 82
False alarm, avoiding uninten‐
tional alarms 42
False alarm, ending an
alarm 41
Fastening safety belts, refer
to Safety belts 48
Fault messages, refer to
Check Control 82
Filling capacities 271
Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter with au‐
tomatic climate control 113
Fine wood, care 265
First aid kit 258
Fitting for towing 261
Flashing when locking/
unlocking 35
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
chains 241
Flat tire, run-flat tires 241
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 95
Flat tire, warning light 94, 96
Flat tire, wheel change 255
Flooding, refer to Driving
through water 133
Floor carpet, care 265
Floor mats, care 265
FM/AM station 168
Fog lamps, indicator lamp 88
Fog lights 88
Foldable rear seat back‐
rest 121
Folding sun visor 119
Foot brake 133
Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐
rior lights 89
For your own safety 7
Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 101
Front airbags 90
Front fog lights 88
Front passenger airbags, de‐
activating 91
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 93
Fuel 230
Fuel, additives 230
Fuel, average consump‐
tion 75
Fuel cap 228
Fuel cap, closing 228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Fuel consumption display,
average fuel consump‐
tion 75
Fuel consumption display,
current fuel consump‐
tion 74
Fuel-efficient driving, refer to
Current fuel consump‐
tion 74
Fuel filler flap 228
Fuel filler flap, closing 228
Fuel filler flap, opening 228
Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
case of an electrical mal‐
function 229
Fuel gauge 74
Fuel, refer to Average fuel
consumption 75
Fuel, saving 139
Fuel tank capacity, refer to
Filling capacities 271
Fuel tank contents, refer to
Filling capacities 271
Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐
pacities 271
Fuse 256
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 115
Gasoline 230
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 74
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 157
Gear change, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68, 71
Gear change, via shift pad‐
dles 71
Gear display, automatic trans‐
mission with Steptronic 67
General driving notes 132
Glare protection 119
Glass sunroof, electric, opera‐
tion 34
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 44
Glove compartment 125
Glove compartment, light‐
ing 125
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐
gation system 144
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 270
H
Halogen headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 251
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 63
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 116
Hands-free microphone 18
Hazard warning system 257
HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 101
HD Radio 169
Head airbags 90
Headlamp control, refer to
Parking lamps/low
beams 85
Headlamp flasher 64
Headlamps, bulb replace‐
ment 251
Headlamps, care 264
Headlamps, cleaning 66
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 86
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 86
Headlight cover, remov‐
ing 251
Headlight flasher, indicator
lamp 17
Headlights 85
Headlights, cleaning, washer
fluid 67
Headliner 19
Reference
Head restraints 49
Head restraints, adjusting the
height 49
Head restraints, removing 50
Heatable mirrors 52
Heatable rear window 113
Heatable seats 48
Heating, mirrors 52
Heating, seats 48
Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing
cargo 137
Height adjustment, seats 46
Height, refer to Dimen‐
sions 270
High-beam Assistant 87
High-beams 87
High beams/low beams, auto‐
matic, refer to High-beam
Assistant 87
High beams, bulb replace‐
ment 251
High-beams, indicator
lamp 17
High-pressure washers 263
Hill Descent Control
HDC 101
Hill drive-off assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 102
Hills 134
Holder for beverages 127
Holder for remote control, re‐
fer to Ignition lock 59
Homepage 6
Hood 243
Hood, opening 243
Horn 14
Hot exhaust system 133
Hotline 223
House number, entering for
navigation 147
Hydraulic brake assistant 99
Hydroplaning 133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
285
Reference
Everything from A to Z
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 73
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 73
Identification marks, tires 237
Identification number, refer to
Engine compartment 242
iDrive 20
iDrive, changing settings 79
iDrive, changing the date and
time 78
iDrive, changing the lan‐
guage 79
iDrive, changing the units of
measure and display for‐
mat 77
iDrive, setting the bright‐
ness 80
Ignition 60
Ignition key position 1, refer
to Radio ready state 59
Ignition key position 2, refer
to Ignition on 60
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 32
Ignition lock 59
Ignition, switched off 60
Ignition, switched on 60
Indication of a flat tire 94, 96
Indicator and warning
lights 17
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 32
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐
fer to Flat Tire Monitor 93
Inflation pressure, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 232
Information on the navigation
data 144
Initialization after power fail‐
ure 256
Initializing
– Refer to Setting the time
and date 78
286
Initializing, compass, refer to
Calibrating 118
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 93
Initializing panoramic glass
sunroof 45
Initializing, Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 96
Inside brake lamps, bulb re‐
placement 254
Installation location, tele‐
phone 126
Instrument cluster 16
Instrument lighting 89
Instrument panel, refer to In‐
strument cluster 16
Instruments, refer to Cock‐
pit 14
Integrated key 32
Integrated universal remote
control 115
Interactive map 151
Interior equipment 115
Interior lights 89
Interior lights, remote con‐
trol 35
Interior mirror 52
Interior motion sensor 42
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming 52
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 117
Interior temperature, setting,
automatic climate con‐
trol 110
Interlock, refer to Disengag‐
ing the remote control 67
Intermediate destina‐
tions 153
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 147
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 255
Jack, refer to Vehicle
jack 255
Joystick, refer to Selector
lever 70
Jump-starting 258
K
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 39
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 39
Key Memory, refer to Per‐
sonal Profile 32
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 32
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission with Step‐
tronic 68, 70
Knee airbag 90
Knocking control 230
L
Label, run-flat tire 241
Lamp and bulb replacement,
light replacement 250
Lamps 85
Lamps, automatic headlight
control 86
Lamps, High-beam Assis‐
tant 87
Lamps, replacing, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 250
Language, changing on the
Control Display 79
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 48
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 55
Leather, care 264
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 250
Length, refer to Dimen‐
sions 270
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 255
Light-alloy wheels, care 265
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 250
Lighter 119
Lighting
– Instruments 89
Lighting, light and bulb re‐
placement 250
Lighting, vehicle, refer to
Lamps 85
Lights, parking lamps/low
beams 85
Light switch 85
Limit, refer to Speed limit 83
Load 137
Loading 136
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 37
Locking from the inside 37
Locking from the outside 34
Locking, setting the confirma‐
tion signals 35
Locking the vehicle from the
inside 37
Locking without remote con‐
trol, refer to Comfort Ac‐
cess 39
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 57
Longlife oils, alternative oil
types 245
Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐
proved engine oils 245
Low beams 85
Low beams, automatic 86
Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 87
Low beams, bulb replace‐
ment 251
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 47
Luggage rack, rear luggage
rack 138
Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 138
Lumbar support 47
M
Main inspection, refer to
Service requirements 80
Maintenance 247
Maintenance, refer to Service
booklet
Maintenance, refer to Service
requirements 80
Maintenance require‐
ments 247
Maintenance system
BMW 247
Makeup mirror 119
Malfunction, automatic trans‐
mission with Steptronic 69
Malfunction, door lock 37
Malfunction, fuel filler
flap 229
Malfunction, tailgate 38
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 82
Manual air distribution 111
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68, 71
Manual operation, door
lock 37
Manual operation, driver's
door 37
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 229
Reference
Manual operation, selector
lever lock, automatic trans‐
mission 69
Manual seat adjustment 46
Map, destination entry 151
Map display in black and
white 160
Map in split screen 159
Map view 157
Marking on approved
tires 240
Master key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 32
Maximum cooling 111
Maximum speed, winter
tires 240
Medical kit, refer to First aid
kit 258
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 50
Menus, operating, iDrive 20
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 21
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 159
Messages 212
Microfilter, with automatic cli‐
mate control 113
Minimum tread, tires 239
Mirror, memory, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 50
Mirrors 51
Mirrors
– Automatic Curb Monitor 51
Mirrors, folding in and out 52
Mirrors, heating 52
Mirrors, interior mirror 52
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 133
Mobile phone, installation lo‐
cation, refer to Center arm‐
rest 126
Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 198
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
287
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 20
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 54
MP3 player 186
Multimedia 176
Music collection 181
Music search 183
Music, storing 181
N
Navigation 144
Navigation data 144
Navigation data, updat‐
ing 144
Navigation system, destina‐
tion entry by voice 152
Neck restraints, refer to Head
restraints 49
Nets, refer to Storage com‐
partments 127
Neutral cleaner, care 265
New wheels and tires 239
Notes 6, 215
Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐
tion 113
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 248
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis 248
Octane number, refer to Fuel
quality 230
Octane rating, refer to Rec‐
ommended fuel grade 230
Odometer 73
Office 209
Oil additives 245
Oil consumption 243
Oil, refer to Engine oil 243
Oil types, alternative 245
Oil types, approved 245
288
Old batteries, disposal 256
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 248
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 20
Onboard vehicle tool kit 249
Opening and closing, Comfort
Access 39
Opening and closing from the
inside 37
Opening and closing from the
outside 34
Opening and closing using
the door lock 36
Opening and closing using
the remote control 34
Operating concept, iDrive 20
Outside-air mode, automatic
climate control 112
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐
lated air mode 112
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 74
P
Paint, vehicle 264
Pairing, mobile phone 199
Panic mode 35
Panoramic glass sunroof 44
Panoramic glass sunroof,
convenient operation 34
Panoramic glass sunroof, ini‐
tializing 45
Panoramic glass sunroof,
opening/closing 44
Panoramic glass sunroof,
pinch protection 45
Panoramic glass sunroof,
power failure 45
Panoramic glass sunroof, re‐
mote control 34
Panoramic glass sunroof, tilt‐
ing 44
Park Distance Control
PDC 105
Parked-car ventilation 113
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 134
Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 105
Parking assistant, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 105
Parking brake 63
Parking lamps 85
Parking lamps/low beams 85
Parking lights, bulb replace‐
ment 252
Partition net 121
Passenger side mirror, tilt‐
ing 51
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 105
Performance Control 101
Personal information 209
Personal Profile 32
Pinch protection, panoramic
glass sunroof 45
Pinch protection, win‐
dows 43
Plastic, care 265
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter with
automatic climate con‐
trol 113
Poor road operation 134
Position, storing 148
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 147
Power failure 256
Power windows, opening and
closing 43
Power windows, refer to Win‐
dows 42
Power windows, safety
switch 43
Prescribed engine oils, refer
to Approved engine oils 245
Pressure, tires 232
Pressure warning, tires 93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Profile depth, refer to Mini‐
mum tread depth 239
Profile, tires 238
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection, panoramic
glass sunroof 45
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system,
windows 43
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 21
R
Radiator fluid, refer to Cool‐
ant 246
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 32
Radio ready state 59
Radio ready state, switched
off 60
Radio ready state, switched
on 59
Radio setting, refer to Radio
ready state 59
Rain sensor 65
Random 177
Random playback 177
Range 75
RDS 169
Reading lights 89
Reading out loud 216
Rear lights, refer to Tail
lights 253
Rear luggage rack 138
Rear seat backrest, folda‐
ble 121
Rear seats, adjusting the
backrest tilt 121
Rear seats, adjusting the
head restraints 50
Rear seats, folding down 121
Rear seats, folding down the
backrests 121
Rear socket 120
Rearview camera, clean‐
ing 109
Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐
rors 51
Rear window defroster 113
Rear window, washing 66
Rear window wiper 66
Recirculated air mode 112
Recommended fuel
grade 230
Recommended tire
brands 240
Redialing 205
Refueling 228
Remaining distance to desti‐
nation, refer to Com‐
puter 76
Remaining range for service,
refer to Service require‐
ments 80
Remaining range, refer to
Range 75
Reminders 216
Remote app 225
Remote control 32
Remote control, battery re‐
placement 41
Remote control, Comfort Ac‐
cess 39
Remote control, garage door
opener 115
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 36
Remote control, removing
from the ignition lock 59
Remote control, service
data 247
Remote control, tailgate 35
Remote control, univer‐
sal 115
Remote inquiry 204
Remote Services 225
Replacement fuse 256
Reference
Replacement remote con‐
trol 32
Replacing wheels/tires 239
Reporting safety defects 9
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 74
Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐
fer to Washer fluid reser‐
voir 67
Resetting, Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 96
Restraining systems, refer to
Safety belts 48
Restraint systems for chil‐
dren 54
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 137
Retreaded tires 240
Reverse gear, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68
Rim cleaner, care 265
Road, avoiding 155
Road detour 155
Roadside Assistance 221
Roadside parking lamp, bulb
replacement 253
Roadside parking lights 87
RON recommended fuel
grade 230
RON, refer to Fuel qual‐
ity 230
Roof load capacity 270
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 138
Rope, refer to Towing 261
Route 156
Route criteria, route 155
Route, displaying 156
Route section, bypass‐
ing 156
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 241
Rubber components,
care 265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
289
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Run-flat tires 241
Run-flat tires, tire inflation
pressure 232
S
Safe braking 133
Safety 7
Safety belts, care 265
Safety belts, damage 49
Safety belts, indicator/warn‐
ing lamp 49
Safety belts, reminder 49
Safety switch for rear win‐
dows 43
Safety systems, airbags 90
Safety systems, safety
belts 48
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 241
Satellite radio 170
Saving fuel 139
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 158
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 20
Search, refer to BMW On‐
line 222
Seat adjustment, electric 47
Seat adjustment, manual 46
Seat and mirror memory 50
Seat belts 48
Seat heating 48
Seats 46
Seats, adjusting 46
Seats, memory, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 50
Seats, sitting safely 46
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68, 70
Selector lever lock, overrid‐
ing 69
Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing the selector lever
positions, shiftlock 68
290
Selector lever lock, releas‐
ing 70
Selector lever positions, auto‐
matic transmission with
Steptronic 68
Sensors, care 266
Service and warranty 8
Service data in the remote
control 247
Service interval display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 247
Service interval display, refer
to Service requirements 80
Service requirements 80
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Serv‐
ice 247
Services, remote 225
Servotronic 102
Settings and information 76
Settings, changing on the
Control Display 79
Settings, clock, 12h/24h
mode 78
Settings, DVD 179
Settings, language 79
Settings, refer to Personal
Profile 32
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion with Steptronic 68, 71
Shift lever, automatic trans‐
mission with Steptronic 68
Shift paddles 71
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 69
Short commands, voice acti‐
vation 272
Side airbags 90
Side windows, refer to Win‐
dows 42
Sitting safely 46
Size, refer to Dimensions 270
Ski bag, refer to Ski and
snowboard bag 124
Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to
Panoramic glass sunroof 44
Slot for remote control 59
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 119
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 207
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Storage compartment of
center armrest 126
Snow chains 241
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nosis 248
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 119
Software applications,
iPhone 224
Software part number 198
Software update 193
SOS, refer to Emergency Re‐
quest, initiating 257
Spare fuse 256
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 149
Special equipment, series
equipment 6
Speed, average 75
Speed limit 83
Speed limit, setting 84
Speedometer 16
Speed, with winter tires 240
Split screen 24
Split screen map set‐
tings 159
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 157
Sport program, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68, 71
Spray nozzles, refer to Clean‐
ing the windshield and head‐
lamps 66
Spray nozzles, refer to Wind‐
shield washer nozzles 66
Stability control systems 99
Start/Stop button 59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Start/Stop button, starting the
engine 60
Start/Stop button, switching
off the engine 61
Starting the engine 60
Start problems, refer to
Jump-starting 258
State/province, selecting for
navigation 146
Stations, stored 174
Station, storing 168
Status information, iDrive 23
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steam jets 263
Steering wheel 53
Steering wheel, adjusting 53
Steering wheel lock 59
Steering wheel, shift pad‐
dles 69
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 67
Steptronic, refer to Sport pro‐
gram and manual mode M/
S 71
Stopping, engine 61
Storage compartment
nets 127
Storage compartments 125
Storage, tires 241
Storing the vehicle 266
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 147
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 232
Summer tires, tread 238
Sun visor 119
Switches, refer to Cockpit 14
Switching off, engine 61
Switching off, vehicle 61
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 114
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 74
Tailgate 38
Tailgate, Comfort Access 40
Tailgate emergency opera‐
tion, refer to Opening man‐
ually 38
Tailgate, opening from the in‐
side 38
Tailgate, opening from the
outside 38
Tailgate, opening man‐
ually 38
Tailgate, remote control 35
Tail lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 255
Tail lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 254
Tail lights 253
Tank gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 74
Tasks 215
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 270
Telephone 198
Telephone, adjusting the vol‐
ume 202
Telephone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 126
TeleService 221
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 111
Temperature, changing the
unit of measure 77
Temperature, coolant, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Temperature display
– External temperature warn‐
ing 73
Temperature display, external
temperature 73
Temperature display, setting
the units 77
Temperature, engine oil 74
Reference
Temperature warning 73
Text messages 212
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 41
Thigh support adjustment 47
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 255
Tilt alarm sensor 42
Tilting the passenger side
mirror 51
Time, setting the time 77
Tire age 237
Tire identification marks 237
Tire inflation pressure 232
Tire inflation pressure, check‐
ing 232
Tire pressure monitor, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 93
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
Tire Quality Grading 238
Tires, breaking in 132
Tires, changing 239
Tires, condition 238
Tires, damage 239
Tire size 237
Tires, minimum tread 239
Tires, retreaded tires 240
Tires, run-flat tires 241
Tires, storage 241
Tire tread 238
Toll roads, route 155
Tone 166
Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 249
Tools, refer to Onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit 249
Tow bar 261
Tow fitting 261
Towing 259
Towing with automatic trans‐
mission 260
Town/city, navigation 147
Tow rope 261
Tow-starting 262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
291
Reference
Everything from A to Z
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 95
Traction control 100
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 159
Transmission, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 67, 70
Transmission lock, refer to
Changing the selector lever
positions 68
Transmission lock, refer to P
Park 68
Transmission, overriding se‐
lector lever lock in case of
automatic transmission with
Steptronic 69
Transmission positions, auto‐
matic transmission with
Steptronic 70
Transporting children
safely 54
Treble, tone 166
Trip computer, refer to Dis‐
plays on the Control Dis‐
play 76
Trip-distance counter, refer
to Trip odometer 73
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 64
Trip odometer 73
Trips, planning 153
Trunk, refer to Cargo
area 120
Turning circle, refer to Dimen‐
sions 270
Turning lamps, refer to Adap‐
tive Light Control 86
Turn signal, bulb replace‐
ment 253
Turn signal, indicator/warning
lamp 16
Turn signals 64
Turn signals, bulb replace‐
ment, front 253
292
Turn signals, triple turn signal
activation 64
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQG 238
Unintentional alarms 42
Units, average fuel consump‐
tion 77
Units of measure, changing
on the Control Display 77
Units, temperature 77
Universal remote control 115
Unlocking, from the inside 37
Unlocking, from the out‐
side 34
Unlocking, hood 243
Unlocking, setting the unlock‐
ing characteristics 34
Unlocking the tailgate 40
Unlocking without remote
control, refer to Comfort Ac‐
cess 39
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 6
Update, software 193
Upholstery care 264
USB audio interface 187
USB interface 125
V
Vacuum cleaner, connecting,
refer to Connecting electri‐
cal devices 119
Vanity mirror 119
Vehicle battery, chang‐
ing 255
Vehicle, breaking in 132
Vehicle care 264
Vehicle care, refer to
Care 263
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 198
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification num‐
ber in the engine compart‐
ment 242
Vehicle jack 255
Vehicle paint 264
Vehicle storage 266
Vehicle, switching off 61
Vehicle wash 263
Ventilation 113
Ventilation, draft-free 113
Ventilation, refer to Parkedcar ventilation 113
Version of the navigation
data 144
Video playback 178
Voice activation, naviga‐
tion 152
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 272
Voice activation system 27
Volume, setting 166
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 17
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 82
Warning signal volumes 167
Warning triangle 258
Washer/wiper system 64
Washer/wiper system, rain
sensor 65
Washer/wiper system, washer
fluid 67
Washer/wiper system, wind‐
shield washer nozzles 66
Washer fluid 67
Washer fluid reservoir 67
Washing, vehicle 263
Waste tray, refer to Ash‐
tray 119
Water on roads, refer to Driv‐
ing through water 133
Weights 270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Welcome lights 85
Wheelbase, refer to Dimen‐
sions 270
Wheel change 255
Wheels and tires 232
Wheels, changing 239
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 93
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 95
Width, refer to Dimen‐
sions 270
Window, convenient opera‐
tion 34
Windows 42
Windows, defrosting and de‐
fogging, automatic climate
control 112
Windows, pinch protec‐
tion 43
Windows, safety switch 43
Windshield, cleaning 66
Windshield, defrosting, refer
to Defrosting windows 112
Windshield wash 64
Windshield washer fluid 67
Windshield wash, rear win‐
dow 66
Windshield wash, reservoir for
washer fluid 67
Windshield wash, washer
fluid 67
Windshield wash, washer
nozzles 66
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 249
Windshield wiper, refer to
Washer/wiper system 64
Winter storage, care 266
Winter tires, setting the speed
limit 84
Winter tires, suitable
tires 240
Winter tires, tread 239
Wiper blades, changing 249
Wiper fluid 67
Reference
Wood, care 265
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Working in the engine com‐
partment 243
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 249
X
xDrive 101
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15
293
More about BMW
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01 40 2 954 052 ue
bmwusa.com
*BL295405200R*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 052 - II/15